Variable power optical system and imaging apparatus

Abstract

The invention provides a variable magnification optical system which is small in size, small in F value in the whole variable magnification range and capable of maintaining good optical performance in the whole variable magnification range, and an imaging device provided with the variable magnification optical system. The variable magnification optical system includes, in order from an object side, a front group, an intermediate group, and a rear group. The front group includes two or less lens groups having a positive refractive power. The intermediate group includes two or less lens groups having negative refractive power. The rear group includes a plurality of lens groups. The lens group closest to the object side in the rear group has positive refractive power. When changing magnification, the lens group closest to the object side of the front group moves, and all intervals between adjacent lens groups change. The variable magnification optical system satisfies a preset conditional expression.

Description

Technical Field

[0001] The technology of the present invention relates to a variable magnification optical system and a camera device. Background Art

[0002] Conventionally, as a variable power optical system that can be used in an imaging device such as a digital camera, a variable power optical system described in Patent Document 1 listed below is known.

[0003] Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2022-028060 Summary of the invention

[0004] There is a demand for a zoom optical system that is compact, has a small F value throughout the zoom range, and maintains good optical performance throughout the zoom range. These requirements are increasing year by year.

[0005] The present invention provides a zoom optical system which is compact, has a small F value in the entire zoom range and maintains good optical performance in the entire zoom range, and an imaging device having the zoom optical system.

[0006] The first embodiment of the present invention is a variable power optical system, which includes a front group, a middle group and a rear group in sequence from the object side to the image side, the front group includes no more than two lens groups with positive refractive power, the middle group includes no more than two lens groups with negative refractive power, and the rear group includes multiple lens groups. The lens group closest to the object side of the rear group has positive refractive power. When changing the power, the lens group closest to the object side of the front group moves, and all intervals between adjacent lens groups change, satisfying the following conditional expressions (1), (2) and (3).

[0007] 5<TLw / (fw×tanωw)<12 (1)

[0008] 0.5<Bfw / (fw×tanωw)<2.5 (2)

[0009] 1.8<Fnot×(TLt / ft)<5 (3)

[0010] The symbols of conditional expressions (1), (2), and (3) are defined as follows. The sum of the distance on the optical axis from the lens surface closest to the object side of the front group to the lens surface closest to the image side of the rear group in the state of focusing on an infinite object at the wide-angle end and the back focal length of the entire system in terms of air-converted distance is set to TLw. The focal length of the entire system in the state of focusing on an infinite object at the wide-angle end is set to fw. The maximum half angle of view in the state of focusing on an infinite object at the wide-angle end is set to ωw. The back focal length of the entire system in the state of focusing on an infinite object at the wide-angle end is set to Bfw. The open F value in the state of focusing on an infinite object at the telephoto end is set to Fnot. The sum of the distance on the optical axis from the lens surface closest to the object side of the front group to the lens surface closest to the image side of the rear group in the state of focusing on an infinite object at the telephoto end and the back focal length of the entire system in terms of air-converted distance is set to TLt. The focal length of the entire system in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the telephoto end is ft.

[0011] Regarding the second aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the first aspect, the following conditional expression (3-1) is satisfied.

[0012] 1.9<Fnot×(TLt / ft)<4.6 (3-1)

[0013] Regarding the third aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the second aspect, the following conditional expression (3-2) is satisfied.

[0014] 2<Fnot×(TLt / ft)<4.3 (3-2)

[0015] Regarding a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the third aspect, the following conditional expression (3-3) is satisfied.

[0016] 2.2<Fnot×(TLt / ft)<4 (3-3)

[0017] In a fifth aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the first aspect, conditional expression (4) shown below is satisfied.

[0018] 0.34<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.97 (4)

[0019] Regarding the sixth aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the fifth aspect, the following conditional expression (4-1) is satisfied.

[0020] 0.36<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.92 (4-1)

[0021] Regarding the seventh aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the sixth aspect, the following conditional expression (4-2) is satisfied.

[0022] 0.38<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.87 (4-2)

[0023] Regarding the eighth aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the seventh aspect, the following conditional expression (4-3) is satisfied.

[0024] 0.41<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.8 (4-3)

[0025] According to a ninth aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the first aspect, when the open F value in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide angle end is defined as Fnow, the following conditional expression (5) is satisfied.

[0026] 0.075<tanωw / Fnow<0.3 (5)

[0027] Regarding a tenth aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the ninth aspect, conditional expression (5-1) shown below is satisfied.

[0028] 0.092<tanωw / Fnow<0.27 (5-1)

[0029] Regarding the eleventh aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the tenth aspect, the following conditional expression (5-2) is satisfied.

[0030] 0.105<tanωw / Fnow<0.25 (5-2)

[0031] In the twelfth aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the first aspect, the following conditional expression (6) is satisfied.

[0032] 1.1<TLt / TLw<1.9 (6)

[0033] Regarding the 13th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 12th aspect, the following conditional expression (6-1) is satisfied.

[0034] 1.15<TLt / TLw<1.48 (6-1)

[0035] Regarding the 14th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 12th aspect, the following conditional expression (3-3) is satisfied.

[0036] 2.2<Fnot×(TLt / ft)<4 (3-3)

[0037] Regarding the fifteenth aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the fourteenth aspect, the following conditional expression (4-3) is satisfied.

[0038] 0.41<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.8 (4-3)

[0039] Regarding the sixteenth aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the fifteenth aspect, the following conditional expression (5-2) is satisfied.

[0040] 0.105<tanωw / Fnow<0.25 (5-2)

[0041] Regarding the 17th mode of the present invention, in the zoom optical system of the 3rd mode, when the focal length of the front group in the state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end is set to fFw, and the focal length of the middle group in the state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end is set to fMw, the conditional expression (7) shown below is satisfied.

[0042] 0.8<fFw / (-fMw)<8 (7)

[0043] With regard to the eighteenth aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the seventeenth aspect, the following conditional expression (7-1) is satisfied.

[0044] 1.1<fFw / (-fMw)<5.3 (7-1)

[0045] Regarding the 19th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 18th aspect, the following conditional expression (8) is satisfied.

[0046] 0.8<TLw / ft<1.5 (8)

[0047] Regarding the 20th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 19th aspect, the following conditional expression (6-1) is satisfied.

[0048] 1.15<TLt / TLw<1.48 (6-1)

[0049] Regarding the 21st aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 20th aspect, the following conditional expression (4-2) is satisfied.

[0050] 0.38<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.87 (4-2)

[0051] Regarding the 22nd aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 21st aspect, the following conditional expression (5-1) is satisfied.

[0052] 0.092<tanωw / Fnow<0.27 (5-1)

[0053] Regarding the 23rd aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 2nd aspect, the following conditional expression (4-1) is satisfied.

[0054] 0.36<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.92 (4-1)

[0055] Regarding the 24th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 23rd aspect, the following conditional expression (5-1) is satisfied.

[0056] 0.092<tanωw / Fnow<0.27 (5-1)

[0057] Regarding the 25th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 23rd aspect, the conditional expression (5-2) shown below is satisfied.

[0058] 0.105<tanωw / Fnow<0.25 (5-2)

[0059] Regarding the 26th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 25th aspect, the rear group includes an Lp1 lens having positive refractive power and an Ln1 lens having negative refractive power and arranged adjacent to the image side of the Lp1 lens. The image side surface of the Lp1 lens is an aspherical surface shape in which the refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is shifted more in the negative direction than the refractive power in the paraxial region. The object side surface of the Ln1 lens is an aspherical surface shape in which the refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is shifted more in the positive direction than the refractive power in the paraxial region.

[0060] Regarding the 27th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 24th aspect, the rear group includes an Ln2 lens having negative refractive power and an Lp2 lens having positive refractive power and arranged adjacent to the image side of the Ln2 lens. The surface on the object side of the Ln2 lens is an aspherical shape in which the refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is more negatively shifted than the refractive power in the paraxial region. The surface on the image side of the Ln2 lens is an aspherical shape in which the refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is more positively shifted than the refractive power in the paraxial region.

[0061] Regarding the 28th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 1st aspect, the following conditional expression (9) is satisfied.

[0062] 2.1<ft / fw<6 (9)

[0063] Regarding the 29th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the first aspect, when the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the front group is set to fF1, the following conditional expression (10) is satisfied.

[0064] 1.5<fF1 / fw<12 (10)

[0065] Regarding the 30th mode of the present invention, in the zoom optical system of the 1st mode, when the focal length of the lens group closest to the object side of the front group is set to fF1, and the focal length of the middle group in the state of focusing on the infinite object at the wide-angle end is set to fMw, the conditional expression (11) shown below is satisfied.

[0066] 2<fF1 / (-fMw)<13 (11)

[0067] Regarding the 31st aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 1st aspect, when the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the front group is set to fF1, the following conditional expression (12) is satisfied.

[0068] 0.7<fF1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 <4.7 (12)

[0069] Regarding the 32nd aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 1st aspect, when the focal length of the intermediate group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide angle end is set to fMw, the following conditional expression (13) is satisfied.

[0070] 0.18<(-fMw) / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 <0.8 (13)

[0071] Regarding the 33rd aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 5th aspect, when the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the front group is set to fF1, the following conditional expression (14) is satisfied.

[0072] 1.3<fF1 / (ft / Fnot)<8 (14)

[0073] Regarding the 34th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 33rd aspect, the following conditional expression (14-1) is satisfied.

[0074] 1.75<fF1 / (ft / Fnot)<2.7 (14-1)

[0075] Regarding the 35th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 34th aspect, the following conditional expression (2-1) is satisfied.

[0076] 0.75<Bfw / (fw×tanωw)<1.84 (2-1)

[0077] Regarding the 36th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 35th aspect, the following conditional expression (5-1) is satisfied.

[0078] 0.092<tanωw / Fnow<0.27 (5-1)

[0079] Regarding the 37th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 36th aspect, the following conditional expression (6) is satisfied.

[0080] 1.1<TLt / TLw<1.9 (6)

[0081] Regarding the 38th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 37th aspect, the following conditional expression (8) is satisfied.

[0082] 0.8<TLw / ft<1.5 (8)

[0083] Regarding the 39th embodiment of the present invention, in the zoom optical system of the 1st embodiment, the zoom optical system includes an aperture stop on the image side more than the lens surface on the image side of the middle group, and when the distance on the optical axis from the lens surface on the object side of the front group to the aperture stop in a state of focusing on an infinite object at the wide-angle end is set to DDL1STw, and the focal length of the lens group on the object side of the front group is set to fF1, the conditional expression (15) shown below is satisfied.

[0084] 0.1<DDL1STw / fF1<0.9 (15)

[0085] Regarding the 40th mode of the present invention, in the zoom optical system of the 1st mode, the zoom optical system includes an aperture stop, and when the distance on the optical axis from the lens surface closest to the object side of the front group to the aperture stop in a state of focusing on an infinite object at the wide-angle end is set to DDL1STw, the conditional expression (16) shown below is satisfied.

[0086] 0.18<DDL1STw / TLw<0.75 (16)

[0087] Regarding the 41st aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the first aspect, when the focal length of the rear group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide angle end is set to fRw, the following conditional expression (17) is satisfied.

[0088] 0.7<fw / fRw<3 (17)

[0089] Regarding the 42nd aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the first aspect, when the focal length of the rear group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the telephoto end is set to fRt, the following conditional expression (18) is satisfied.

[0090] 1.1<ft / fRt<7 (18)

[0091] Regarding the 43rd aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the first aspect, when the focal length of the rear lens group closest to the object is set to fR1, the following conditional expression (19) is satisfied.

[0092] 0.05<fR1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 <3 (19)

[0093] Regarding the 44th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the first aspect, when the focal length of the rear lens group closest to the object is set to fR1, the following conditional expression (20) is satisfied.

[0094] 0.05<fw / fR1<2.5 (20)

[0095] Regarding the 45th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the first aspect, at least one lens group that does not move during variable power is arranged between the lens groups closest to the image side of the front group and the rear group.

[0096] In a 46th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the first aspect, an anti-vibration group is arranged on the image side of the front group so as to move in a direction intersecting the optical axis during image shake correction.

[0097] When the focal length of the anti-vibration group is fIS, the following conditional expression (21) is satisfied.

[0098] 0.07<|fIS / ft|<0.5 (21)

[0099] Regarding the 47th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 46th aspect, the anti-vibration group is arranged in the middle group.

[0100] Regarding the 48th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the first aspect, the focus group that moves along the optical axis during focusing is arranged only in the rear group.

[0101] Regarding the 49th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 48th aspect, two focus groups are arranged in the rear group.

[0102] Regarding the 50th mode of the present invention, in the zoom optical system of the 1st mode, the front group includes a joined lens formed by joining a negative meniscus lens with its convex surface facing the object side and a positive lens with its convex surface facing the object side in sequence from the object side, and when the refractive index of the above-mentioned negative meniscus lens with respect to the d-line is set to Ndn and the Abbe number of the above-mentioned negative meniscus lens based on the d-line is set to vdn, the conditional formula (22) shown below is satisfied.

[0103] 1.94<Ndn+0.01×vdn<2.5 (22)

[0104] Regarding the 51st mode of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 50th mode, when the refractive index of the above-mentioned positive lens with respect to the d-line is set to Ndp and the Abbe number of the above-mentioned positive lens based on the d-line is set to vdp, the conditional expression (23) shown below is satisfied.

[0105] 2<Ndp+0.01×vdp<2.6 (23)

[0106] Regarding the fifty-second aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the first aspect, when the average value of the d-line-based Abbe numbers of all positive lenses in the front group is set to vdFp_ave, the following conditional expression (24) is satisfied.

[0107] 55<vdFp_ave<95 (24)

[0108] Regarding the 53rd mode of the present invention, in the zoom optical system of the 1st mode, when the thickness on the optical axis of the lens group closest to the object side of the front group is set to dF1, and the focal length of the lens group closest to the object side of the front group is set to fF1, the conditional expression (25) shown below is satisfied.

[0109] 0.03<dF1 / fF1<0.35 (25)

[0110] Regarding the fifty-fourth aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the first aspect, when the average value of the specific gravity of all lenses in the front group is set to GFave, the following conditional expression (26) is satisfied.

[0111] 2<GFave<4.3 (26)

[0112] Regarding the 55th mode of the present invention, in the zoom optical system of the 1st mode, the rear group includes, from the object side to the image side, a 1st subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a 2nd subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, and a 3rd subsequent lens group with positive refractive power.

[0113] Regarding the 56th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 55th aspect, when the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1 and the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (27) is satisfied.

[0114] 0.05<fR1 / fR3<0.6 (27)

[0115] Regarding the 57th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 55th aspect, when the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1 and the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, the following conditional expression (28) is satisfied.

[0116] 0.2<fR1 / (-fR2)<1 (28)

[0117] Regarding the 58th mode of the present invention, in the zoom optical system of the 1st mode, the rear group includes, from the object side to the image side, a 1st subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a 2nd subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, and a 3rd subsequent lens group with negative refractive power.

[0118] Regarding the 59th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 58th aspect, when the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1 and the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (29) is satisfied.

[0119] 0.5<fR1 / (-fR3)<1.6 (29)

[0120] Regarding the 60th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 58th aspect, when the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2 and the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (30) is satisfied.

[0121] 0.8<fR2 / (-fR3)<3 (30)

[0122] Regarding the 61st mode of the present invention, in the zoom optical system of the 1st mode, the rear group includes, in sequence from the object side to the image side, at least a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group with positive refractive power.

[0123] Regarding the 62nd aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 61st aspect, when the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1 and the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (29A) is satisfied.

[0124] 0.9<fR1 / (-fR3)<10 (29A)

[0125] Regarding the 63rd aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 61st aspect, when the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2 and the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the conditional expression (30A) shown below is satisfied.

[0126] 0.1<fR2 / (-fR3)<1.8 (30A)

[0127] Regarding the 64th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 61st aspect, when the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1 and the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, the following conditional expression (31) is satisfied.

[0128] 1.2<fR1 / fR2<11 (31)

[0129] Regarding the 65th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 61st aspect, when the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2 and the focal length of the fourth subsequent lens group is set to fR4, the conditional expression (32) shown below is satisfied.

[0130] 0.1<fR2 / fR4<1.5 (32)

[0131] Regarding the 66th mode of the present invention, in the zoom optical system of the 1st mode, the rear group includes, in sequence from the object side to the image side, at least a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group with positive refractive power and a fourth subsequent lens group with negative refractive power.

[0132] Regarding the 67th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 66th aspect, when the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1 and the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the conditional expression (27A) shown below is satisfied.

[0133] 0.25<fR1 / fR3<6 (27A)

[0134] Regarding the 68th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 66th aspect, when the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2 and the focal length of the fourth subsequent lens group is set to fR4, the conditional expression (32A) shown below is satisfied.

[0135] 0.4<fR2 / fR4<18 (32A)

[0136] Regarding the 69th mode of the present invention, in the zoom optical system of the 66th mode, the rear group includes, from the object side to the image side, a 1st subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a 2nd subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, a 3rd subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a 4th subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, a 5th subsequent lens group with positive refractive power and a 6th subsequent lens group with negative refractive power.

[0137] Regarding the 70th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 69th aspect, when the focal length of the 3rd subsequent lens group is set to fR3 and the focal length of the 5th subsequent lens group is set to fR5, the conditional expression (33) shown below is satisfied.

[0138] 0.2<fR3 / fR5<2.5 (33)

[0139] Regarding the 71st embodiment of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 69th embodiment, when the focal length of the 4th subsequent lens group is set to fR4 and the focal length of the 6th subsequent lens group is set to fR6, the conditional expression (34) shown below is satisfied.

[0140] 0.04<fR4 / fR6<4 (34)

[0141] Regarding the 72nd mode of the present invention, in the zoom optical system of the 1st mode, the rear group includes, in sequence from the object side to the image side, at least a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group with positive refractive power and a fourth subsequent lens group with negative refractive power.

[0142] Regarding the 73rd aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 72nd aspect, when the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1 and the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, the conditional expression (31A) shown below is satisfied.

[0143] 0.06<fR1 / fR2<0.7 (31A)

[0144] Regarding the 74th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 72nd aspect, when the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2 and the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the conditional expression (35) shown below is satisfied.

[0145] 0.5<fR2 / fR3<11 (35)

[0146] Regarding the 75th mode of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 72nd mode, when the focal length of the 3rd subsequent lens group is set to fR3 and the focal length of the 4th subsequent lens group is set to fR4, the conditional expression (36) shown below is satisfied.

[0147] 0.2<fR3 / (-fR4)<3 (36)

[0148] Regarding the 76th mode of the present invention, in the zoom optical system of the 1st mode, the rear group includes, from the object side to the image side, a 1st subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a 2nd subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a 3rd subsequent lens group with negative refractive power and a 4th subsequent lens group with negative refractive power.

[0149] Regarding the 77th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 76th aspect, when the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1 and the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, the conditional expression (31B) shown below is satisfied.

[0150] 0.6<fR1 / fR2<4 (31B)

[0151] Regarding the 78th embodiment of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 76th embodiment, when the focal length of the 3rd subsequent lens group is set to fR3 and the focal length of the 4th subsequent lens group is set to fR4, the conditional expression (37) shown below is satisfied.

[0152] 0.05<fR3 / fR4<1 (37)

[0153] Regarding the 79th mode of the present invention, in the zoom optical system of the 1st mode, the rear group includes, in sequence from the object side to the image side, at least a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, and a third subsequent lens group with negative refractive power.

[0154] Regarding the 80th aspect of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 79th aspect, when the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1 and the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, the conditional expression (28A) shown below is satisfied.

[0155] 0.2<fR1 / (-fR2)<1 (28A)

[0156] Regarding the 81st embodiment of the present invention, in the variable power optical system of the 79th embodiment, when the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2 and the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the conditional expression (35A) shown below is satisfied.

[0157] 0.2<fR2 / fR3<1 (35A)

[0158] The 82nd aspect of the present invention is an imaging device having the variable power optical system of any one of the 1st to 81st aspects.

[0159] In addition, the words "including..." and "including..." in this specification mean that in addition to the listed constituent elements, it may also include lenses that essentially have no refractive power, optical elements other than lenses such as apertures, filters and cover glasses, and mechanical parts such as lens flanges, lens barrels, camera elements and hand-shake correction mechanisms.

[0160] The “group of ~ with positive refractive power” and “group of ~ with positive refractive power” in this specification mean that the group as a whole has positive refractive power. Similarly, the “group of ~ with negative refractive power” means that the group as a whole has negative refractive power. “Lens with positive refractive power” and “positive lens” have the same meaning. “Lens with negative refractive power” and “negative lens” have the same meaning. The “group of ~” in this specification is not limited to a structure including multiple lenses, but may also be a structure including only one lens.

[0161] A composite aspherical lens (a lens (e.g., a spherical lens) and a film having an aspherical shape formed on the lens are integrated and function as a single aspherical lens as a whole) is used as a single lens and is not considered a cemented lens. Unless otherwise specified, the sign of the refractive power and the surface shape of the lens including an aspherical surface use the sign of the refractive power and the surface shape of the paraxial region.

[0162] The "entire system" in this specification refers to the variable magnification optical system. The "focal length" used in the conditional expressions is the paraxial focal length. Unless otherwise specified, the "distance on the optical axis" used in the conditional expressions is the geometric distance. Unless otherwise specified, the values ​​used in the conditional expressions are the values ​​when the d line is used as the reference in the state of focusing on an object at infinity.

[0163] Effects of the Invention

[0164] According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a variable power optical system which is compact, has a small F value throughout the entire variable power range, and maintains good optical performance throughout the entire variable power range, and an imaging device including the variable power optical system. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[0165] Figure 1 It is a cross-sectional view and a diagram showing a movement trajectory of a variable power optical system corresponding to the variable power optical system of Example 1 and according to an embodiment.

[0166] Figure 2 This is a diagram for explaining symbols of each conditional expression.

[0167] Figure 3 It is a diagram for explaining the position of the maximum effective diameter.

[0168] Figure 4 1 and 2 are diagrams showing various aberrations of the variable power optical system of Example 1.

[0169] Figure 5 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 2 and a diagram showing a movement trajectory.

[0170] Figure 6 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 2.

[0171] Figure 7 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 3 and a diagram showing the movement trajectory.

[0172] Figure 8 1 and 10 are diagrams showing various aberrations of the variable power optical system of Example 3.

[0173] Fig. 9 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 4 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0174] Fig.10 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 4.

[0175] Fig.11 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 5 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0176] Fig.12 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 5.

[0177] Fig.13 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 6 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0178] Fig.14 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 6.

[0179] Fig.15 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 7 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0180] Fig.16 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 7.

[0181] Fig.17 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 8 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0182] Fig.18 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 8.

[0183] Fig.19 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 9 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0184] Fig. 20 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 9.

[0185] Fig.21 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 10 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0186] Fig. 22 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 10.

[0187] Fig.23 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 11 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0188] Fig.24 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 11.

[0189] Fig.25 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 12 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0190] Fig.26 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 12.

[0191] Fig. 27 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 13 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0192] Fig.28 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 13.

[0193] Fig.29 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 14 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0194] Fig.30 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 14.

[0195] Fig.31 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 15 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0196] Fig.32 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 15.

[0197] Fig.33 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 16 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0198] Fig.34 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 16.

[0199] Fig.35 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 17 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0200] Fig.36 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 17.

[0201] Fig.37 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 18 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0202] Fig.38 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 18.

[0203] Fig.39 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 19 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0204] Fig.40 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 19.

[0205] Fig.41 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 20 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0206] Fig.42 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 20.

[0207] Fig.43 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 21 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0208] Fig.44 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 21.

[0209] Fig.45 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 22 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0210] Fig.46 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 22.

[0211] Fig.47 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 23 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0212] Fig.48 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 23.

[0213] Fig.49 It is a cross-sectional view showing the structure of the variable power optical system of Example 24 and a diagram of the movement trajectory.

[0214] Fig.50 These are various aberration diagrams of the variable power optical system of Example 24.

[0215] Fig.51 This is a perspective view of the front side of the imaging device according to one embodiment.

[0216] Fig.52 This is a perspective view of the back side of the imaging device according to one embodiment.

[0217] Explanation of symbols

[0218] 1-zoom optical system, 20-interchangeable lens, 30-camera, 31-camera body, 32-shutter button, 33-power button, 34-operating unit, 35-operating unit, 36-display unit, 37-mount, Bfw-back focal length, dF1-thickness, DDL1STw-distance, ED-effective diameter, GF-front group, GF1-1st front lens group, GF2-2nd front lens group, GM-middle group, GM1-1st middle lens group, GM2-2nd 2 intermediate lens groups, GR-rear group, GR1-1st subsequent lens group, GR2-2nd subsequent lens group, GR3-3rd subsequent lens group, GR4-4th subsequent lens group, GR5-5th subsequent lens group, GR6-6th subsequent lens group, Lx-lens, Px-position, Sim-image plane, St-aperture stop, TLt-total length, TLw-total length, Xa-on-axis beam, Xb-off-axis beam, Xb1-light, Z-optical axis, ωw-maximum half viewing angle. DETAILED DESCRIPTION

[0219] Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[0220] exist Figure 1 A cross-sectional view of the structure and movement trajectory of a variable power optical system according to an embodiment of the present invention is shown in FIG. Figure 1 , the upper section labeled “Wide” shows the wide-angle end state, and the lower section labeled “Tele” shows the telephoto end state. Figure 1 The example shown corresponds to the variable magnification optical system of Example 1 described later. Figure 1 The figure shows the state of focusing on an object at infinity, with the left side being the object side and the right side being the image side. Figure 1 , the on-axis light beam at the wide-angle end and the light beam at the maximum half viewing angle ωw, and the on-axis light beam at the telephoto end and the light beam at the maximum half viewing angle are also shown.

[0221] The zoom optical system of the present invention includes a front group GF, a middle group GM and a rear group GR in sequence from the object side to the image side along the optical axis Z. The front group GF includes no more than two lens groups with positive refractive power. The middle group includes no more than two lens groups with negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes multiple lens groups. The lens group closest to the object side of the rear group GR has positive refractive power. When zooming, the lens group closest to the object side of the front group GF moves, and all intervals between adjacent lens groups in the zoom optical system change. The above structure is conducive to suppressing various aberrations within the entire zoom range.

[0222] In particular, by configuring the front group GF to be a group having positive refractive power, the total optical length can be shortened, which is advantageous for achieving both miniaturization and high zoom ratio. Furthermore, by configuring the front group GF to be a group having positive refractive power, the height of the light incident on the middle group GM from the optical axis Z can be reduced, which is advantageous for suppressing aberration changes during zooming. By configuring the front group GF to include a lens group having one or two positive refractive powers, and configuring the middle group GM to include a lens group having one or two negative refractive powers, it is advantageous for zooming while suppressing various aberrations. By changing the intervals between the multiple groups during zooming, it is advantageous for suppressing various aberrations throughout the entire zoom range.

[0223] In addition, in this specification, a group whose interval with adjacent groups in the optical axis direction changes when the magnification is changed is set as one lens group. When the magnification is changed, the interval between adjacent lenses inside one lens group does not change. That is, the "lens group" is a component of the zoom optical system, and is a part that includes at least one lens separated by an air gap that changes when the magnification is changed. When the magnification is changed, each lens group moves or does not move as a unit. In addition, not moving when the magnification is changed means being fixed relative to the image plane Sim when the magnification is changed. The "lens group" may include components other than lenses that do not have refractive power, such as aperture stops St, etc.

[0224] As an example, Figure 1 Each group of the variable power optical system shown is constructed as follows. The front group GF includes a lens group consisting of three lenses. The middle group GM includes a lens group consisting of four lenses. The rear group GR includes three lens groups, which are, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 consisting of an aperture stop St and six lenses, a second subsequent lens group GR2 consisting of one lens, and a third subsequent lens group GR3 consisting of one lens. Figure 1 The aperture stop St shown here indicates the position on the optical axis, not the size or shape. Figure 1 As shown in the example of FIG. 1 , when the front group GF is composed of one lens group, it is advantageous for miniaturization. When the middle group GM is composed of one lens group, it is advantageous for miniaturization.

[0225] like Figure 1 As shown in the example of , the front group GF preferably includes a cemented lens formed by cementing a negative meniscus lens with a convex surface facing the object side and a positive lens with a convex surface facing the object side in sequence from the object side. In the case of such a structure, it is easy to correct the magnification chromatic aberration at the wide-angle end and the axial chromatic aberration at the telephoto end.

[0226] exist Figure 1 In the example, when changing the magnification, the distance between the front lens group GF, the middle lens group GM, the first subsequent lens group GR1 and the second subsequent lens group GR2 and the adjacent lens groups changes and moves along the optical axis Z, while the third subsequent lens group GR3 does not move. Figure 1 In the figure, between the Wide diagram and the Tele diagram, for each group that moves when the magnification is changed, a solid arrow is used to represent the approximate movement trajectory when the magnification is changed from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, and for each group that does not move when the magnification is changed, a straight dotted line in the up and down directions is represented.

[0227] exist Figure 1 In the example of the variable magnification optical system, an anti-vibration group is arranged to move in a direction intersecting the optical axis Z during image shake correction. Image shake correction is performed by moving the anti-vibration group. Figure 1 In the example of , the anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM. Figure 1 In FIG. 1 , an arrow in the up-down direction is marked on the lens group corresponding to the anti-vibration group. When the anti-vibration group is arranged in the middle group, it is advantageous to suppress the movement amount of the anti-vibration group during image shake correction.

[0228] And, in Figure 1 In the example of the variable magnification optical system, a focus group is configured to move along the optical axis Z when focusing. Focusing is performed by moving the focus group. Figure 1 In the example of , the focus group includes the second subsequent lens group GR2. Figure 1 In FIG. 1 , arrows in the left and right directions indicating the direction of movement when focusing from an object at infinity to an object at the closest point are marked on the lens group corresponding to the focusing group.

[0229] Next, the preferred structure and achievable structure related to the conditional formula of the variable power optical system of the present invention are described. In addition, in the description related to the following conditional formula, in order to avoid redundant description, the same symbols are used for the parts with the same definition, and the repeated description of the symbols is omitted. Furthermore, in order to avoid redundant description, the "variable power optical system of the present invention" is also referred to as the "variable power optical system" below.

[0230] The zoom optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (1). In which, the back focal length of the entire system in the state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end, measured in terms of air-converted distance, is set to Bfw. Then, the sum of the distance on the optical axis from the lens surface on the object side of the front group GF to the lens surface on the image side of the rear group GR in the state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end and the above-mentioned back focal length Bfw is set to TLw. In addition, the focal length of the entire system in the state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end is set to fw. The maximum half angle of view in the state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end is set to ωw. TLw is the total length in the state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end. Tan in the conditional expression (1) is a tangent, and this expression is the same in other conditional expressions. By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (1) not below the lower limit, it is beneficial to suppress various aberrations in the entire zoom range. By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (1) not above the upper limit, it is beneficial to miniaturize the entire optical system.

[0231] 5<TLw / (fw×tanωw)<12 (1)

[0232] In order to obtain better characteristics, the lower limit of conditional expression (1) is preferably set to any one of 5.5, 6, 6.5 and 7 instead of 5. Furthermore, the upper limit of conditional expression (1) is preferably set to any one of 11, 10.5, 10 and 9.5 instead of 12.

[0233] exist Figure 2 In Figure 1 A cross-sectional view of a variable power optical system is shown, as an example, showing the back focal length Bfw and the total length TLw in the variable power optical system. Figure 2 , the upper section labeled “Wide” shows the wide-angle end state, and the lower section labeled “Tele” shows the telephoto end state.

[0234] As described above, when the back focal length of the entire system in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end is set to Bfw in terms of air-converted distance, the variable-power optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (2). The back focal length in terms of air-converted distance is the air-converted distance on the optical axis from the lens surface of the rear group GR closest to the image side to the image plane Sim. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (2) not less than the lower limit, the back focal length Bfw defined above will not become too short, so it is easy to install the bayonet replacement mechanism. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (2) not more than the upper limit, the back focal length Bfw defined above will not become too long, so it is easy to miniaturize.

[0235] 0.5<Bfw / (fw×tanωw)<2.5 (2)

[0236] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set it to any one of 0.6, 0.68, 0.75 and 0.8 instead of 0.5, which is the lower limit of conditional expression (2). Furthermore, it is preferable to set it to any one of 2.3, 2.1, 1.84 and 1.7 instead of 2.5, which is the upper limit of conditional expression (2). For example, the variable magnification optical system more preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (2-1).

[0237] 0.75<Bfw / (fw×tanωw)<1.84 (2-1)

[0238] The variable magnification optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (3). Here, the open F value in the state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the telephoto end is set to Fnot. The sum of the distance on the optical axis from the lens surface of the front group GF closest to the object side to the lens surface of the rear group GR closest to the image side in the state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the telephoto end and the back focal length of the entire system in terms of air conversion distance is set to TLt. The focal length of the entire system in the state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the telephoto end is set to ft. TLt is the total length in the state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the telephoto end. As an example, Figure 2 The total length TLt is shown in FIG. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (3) not less than the lower limit, it is advantageous to suppress various aberrations in the entire zoom range. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (3) not more than the upper limit, it is advantageous to reduce the F value at the telephoto end and to miniaturize the total length at the same time.

[0239] 1.8<Fnot×(TLt / ft)<5 (3)

[0240] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferred to set it to any one of 1.9, 2, 2.1 and 2.2 instead of 1.8, which is the lower limit of conditional expression (3). Furthermore, it is preferred to set it to any one of 4.6, 4.3, 4.1 and 4 instead of 5, which is the upper limit of conditional expression (3). For example, the variable power optical system more preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (3-1), further preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (3-2), and further preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (3-3).

[0241] 1.9<Fnot×(TLt / ft)<4.6 (3-1)

[0242] 2<Fnot×(TLt / ft)<4.3 (3-2)

[0243] 2.2<Fnot×(TLt / ft)<4 (3-3)

[0244] The zoom optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional formula (4). By making the corresponding value of conditional formula (4) not below the lower limit, it is beneficial to suppress various aberrations in the entire zoom range. By making the corresponding value of conditional formula (4) not above the upper limit, it is beneficial to reduce the F value at the telephoto end. In addition, the total optical length at the wide-angle end will not become too long, which is beneficial to miniaturization.

[0245] 0.34<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.97 (4)

[0246] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferred to set it to any one of 0.36, 0.38, 0.4, 0.41 and 0.42 instead of 0.34, the lower limit of conditional expression (4). Furthermore, it is preferred to set it to any one of 0.92, 0.87, 0.83, 0.8 and 0.77 instead of 0.97, the upper limit of conditional expression (4). For example, the variable magnification optical system more preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (4-1), further preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (4-2), and further preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (4-3).

[0247] 0.36<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.92 (4-1)

[0248] 0.38<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.87 (4-2)

[0249] 0.41<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.8 (4-3)

[0250] When the open F value in the state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end is set to Fnow, the variable magnification optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (5). By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (5) not less than the lower limit, it is easy to expand the viewing angle at the wide-angle end and reduce the open F value at the wide-angle end. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (5) not more than the upper limit, it is beneficial to obtain good optical performance and suppress the increase in the number of lenses and the enlargement of the optical system.

[0251] 0.075<tanωw / Fnow<0.3 (5)

[0252] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferred to set it to either 0.092 or 0.105 instead of 0.075, which is the lower limit of conditional expression (5). Furthermore, it is preferred to set it to either 0.27 or 0.25 instead of 0.3, which is the upper limit of conditional expression (5). For example, the variable magnification optical system more preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (5-1), and further preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (5-2).

[0253] 0.092<tanωw / Fnow<0.27 (5-1)

[0254] 0.105<tanωw / Fnow<0.25 (5-2)

[0255] The zoom optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (6). By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (6) not below the lower limit, it is beneficial to suppress various aberrations in the entire zoom range. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (6) not above the upper limit, the total optical length at the telephoto end will not become too long, which is beneficial to miniaturization.

[0256] 1.1<TLt / TLw<1.9 (6)

[0257] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of conditional expression (6) to 1.1, which is 1.13 or 1.15. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of conditional expression (6) to 1.9, which is 1.68 or 1.48. For example, the variable magnification optical system more preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (6-1).

[0258] 1.15<TLt / TLw<1.48 (6-1)

[0259] The zoom optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (7). Here, the focal length of the front group GF in the state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end is set to fFw. The focal length of the middle group GM in the state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end is set to fMw. By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (7) not less than the lower limit, the refractive power of the middle group GM will not become too weak, so it is easy to suppress the movement of the middle group GM during zooming. By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (7) not more than the upper limit, the refractive power of the front group GF will not become too weak, so it is easy to suppress the enlargement of the front group GF.

[0260] 0.8<fFw / (-fMw)<8 (7)

[0261] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set any one of 0.9, 1 and 1.1 instead of 0.8, which is the lower limit of conditional expression (7). Also, it is preferable to set any one of 7, 6 and 5.3 instead of 8, which is the upper limit of conditional expression (7). For example, the variable power optical system more preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (7-1).

[0262] 1.1<fFw / (-fMw)<5.3 (7-1)

[0263] The variable magnification optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (8). By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (8) not less than the lower limit, it is easy to suppress various aberrations at the wide-angle end. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (8) not more than the upper limit, it is easy to shorten the total optical length at the wide-angle end.

[0264] 0.8<TLw / ft<1.5 (8)

[0265] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.8 in conditional expression (8) to either 0.83 or 0.85, and it is preferable to set the upper limit of 1.5 in conditional expression (8) to either 1.3 or 1.2.

[0266] The zoom optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (9). By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (9) not below the lower limit, the zoom ratio will not become too low, so that the value of the zoom optical system can be fully utilized. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (9) not above the upper limit, the zoom ratio will not become too high, so that the movement of the lens group can be prevented from being too large, thereby contributing to the miniaturization of the optical system as a whole.

[0267] 2.1<ft / fw<6 (9)

[0268] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 2.1 of conditional expression (9) to any one of 2.3, 2.5 and 2.6. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of 6 of conditional expression (9) to any one of 5.5, 5 and 4.7.

[0269] When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object side of the front group GF is set to fF1, the zoom optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (10). By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (10) not less than the lower limit, the refractive power of the front group GF will not become too strong, which is conducive to suppressing the aberration change during zooming. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (10) not more than the upper limit, the refractive power of the front group GF will not become too weak, which is conducive to miniaturization of the front group GF.

[0270] 1.5<fF1 / fw<12 (10)

[0271] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 1.5 of the conditional expression (10) to any one of 1.7, 1.9, 2 and 2.05. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of 12 of the conditional expression (10) to any one of 11, 10, 9 and 8.

[0272] The zoom optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (11). By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (11) not less than the lower limit, the refractive power of the intermediate group will not become too weak, so when the intermediate group moves during zooming, it is helpful to suppress the movement amount of the front group GF during zooming. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (11) not more than the upper limit, the refractive power of the front group GF will not become too weak, so it is helpful to suppress the enlargement of the front group GF.

[0273] 2<fF1 / (-fMw)<13 (11)

[0274] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set any one of 2.2, 2.4, 2.5 and 2.6 instead of the lower limit of 2 in conditional expression (11). Also, it is preferable to set any one of 12.5, 12, 11.5 and 11 instead of the upper limit of 13 in conditional expression (11).

[0275] The zoom optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (12). By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (12) not below the lower limit, the refractive power of the front group GF will not become too strong, which is conducive to suppressing the aberration change during zooming. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (12) not above the upper limit, the refractive power of the front group GF will not become too weak, which is conducive to miniaturization of the front group GF.

[0276] 0.7<fF1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 <4.7 (12)

[0277] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.7 of the conditional expression (12) to any one of 0.9, 1, and 1.05. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of 4.7 of the conditional expression (12) to any one of 4.3, 4, and 2.

[0278] The zoom optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional formula (13). By making the corresponding value of conditional formula (13) not below the lower limit, the refractive power of the intermediate group will not become too strong, so the amount of aberration of the image plane curvature generated in the intermediate group can be suppressed, which is beneficial to the aberration correction when zooming. By making the corresponding value of conditional formula (13) not above the upper limit, the refractive power of the intermediate group will not become too weak, so the movement of the intermediate group when zooming can be suppressed. As a result, the total optical length will not become too long, which is beneficial to miniaturization.

[0279] 0.18<(-fMw) / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 <0.8 (13)

[0280] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of the conditional expression (13) to either 0.2 or 0.22 instead of 0.18. Furthermore, it is preferable to set the upper limit of the conditional expression (13) to either 0.7 or 0.6 instead of 0.8.

[0281] The variable magnification optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (14). By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (14) not below the lower limit, it is conducive to high performance. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (14) not above the upper limit, the refractive power of the front group GF will not become too weak, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the front group GF.

[0282] 1.3<fF1 / (ft / Fnot)<8 (14)

[0283] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of conditional expression (14) to 1.3, which is one of 1.5, 1.7, and 1.75. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of conditional expression (14) to 8, which is one of 7, 6, and 2.7. For example, the variable magnification optical system more preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (14-1).

[0284] 1.75<fF1 / (ft / Fnot)<2.7 (14-1)

[0285] In a configuration in which the variable power optical system includes an aperture stop St on the image side more than the lens surface on the image side of the middle group GM, the variable power optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (15). Here, the distance on the optical axis from the lens surface on the object side of the front group GF to the aperture stop St in a state where the lens surface is focused on an infinitely distant object at the wide angle end is set to DDL1STw. As an example, Figure 2 The above-mentioned distance DDL1STw is shown in . By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (15) not less than the lower limit, the movable range of the middle group GM will not become too small, which is beneficial to high magnification ratio. In addition, since the refractive power of the front group GF will not become too weak, it is beneficial to both miniaturization and high magnification ratio. By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (15) not more than the upper limit, the distance from the lens surface on the object side of the front group GF to the incident pupil position on the wide-angle side will not become too long, so the enlargement of the front group GF can be suppressed, which is beneficial to miniaturization. Alternatively, by making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (15) not more than the upper limit, the refractive power of the front group GF will not become too strong, which is beneficial to high performance.

[0286] 0.1<DDL1STw / fF1<0.9 (15)

[0287] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of conditional expression (15) to either 0.13 or 0.15 instead of 0.1. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of conditional expression (15) to either 0.9 to either 0.75 or 0.66 instead of 0.9.

[0288] In a structure in which the zoom optical system includes an aperture stop St, the zoom optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (16). By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (16) not less than the lower limit, the distance between the aperture stop St and the front group GF will not become too short on the wide-angle side, and thus the distance from the lens surface of the front group GF closest to the object side to the entrance pupil position will not become too short, thereby making it easy to suppress aberration changes during zooming. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (16) not more than the upper limit, the distance between the aperture stop St and the front group GF will not become too long on the wide-angle side, and thus the distance from the lens surface of the front group GF closest to the object side to the entrance pupil position will not become too long. As a result, the enlargement of the front group GF can be suppressed, which is conducive to miniaturization.

[0289] 0.18<DDL1STw / TLw<0.75 (16)

[0290] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of conditional expression (16) to either 0.2 or 0.22 instead of 0.18. Furthermore, it is preferable to set the upper limit of conditional expression (16) to either 0.6 or 0.52 instead of 0.75.

[0291] When the focal length of the rear group GR in the state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end is set to fRw, the variable magnification optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (17). By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (17) not less than the lower limit, it is easy to shorten the total optical length at the wide-angle end, which is conducive to miniaturization. By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (17) not more than the upper limit, it is conducive to suppressing spherical aberration at the wide-angle end.

[0292] 0.7<fw / fRw<3 (17)

[0293] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.7 of the conditional expression (17) to either 0.8 or 0.9. Also, it is preferable to set the upper limit of 3 of the conditional expression (17) to either 2.5 or 2.3.

[0294] When the focal length of the rear group GR in the state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the telephoto end is set to fRt, the variable magnification optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (18). By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (18) not less than the lower limit, it is easy to shorten the total optical length at the telephoto end, which is conducive to miniaturization. By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (18) not more than the upper limit, it is conducive to suppressing spherical aberration at the telephoto end.

[0295] 1.1<ft / fRt<7 (18)

[0296] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of conditional expression (18) to either 1.3 or 1.5 instead of 1.1. Also, it is preferable to set the upper limit of conditional expression (18) to either 6 or 5.2 instead of 7.

[0297] When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object side of the rear group GR is set to fR1, the zoom optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (19). By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (19) not less than the lower limit, the refractive power of the lens group closest to the object side of the rear group GR will not become too strong, which is conducive to suppressing the aberration change during zooming. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (19) not more than the upper limit, the refractive power of the lens group closest to the object side of the rear group GR will not become too weak, which is conducive to miniaturization.

[0298] 0.05<fR1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 <3 (19)

[0299] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.05 of the conditional expression (19) to any one of 0.15, 0.25 and 0.3. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of 3 of the conditional expression (19) to any one of 2, 1.5 and 1.

[0300] The zoom optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (20). By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (20) not less than the lower limit, the positive refractive power of the lens group closest to the object side of the rear group GR will not become too weak, which is particularly beneficial for correcting spherical aberration at the wide-angle end. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (20) not more than the upper limit, the positive refractive power of the lens group closest to the object side of the rear group GR will not become too strong, which is beneficial for suppressing the change of spherical aberration when zooming.

[0301] 0.05<fw / fR1<2.5 (20)

[0302] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.05 of the conditional expression (20) to any one of 0.3, 0.45 and 0.57. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of 2.5 of the conditional expression (20) to any one of 2.1, 1.8 and 1.1.

[0303] In a structure in which an anti-vibration group is arranged closer to the image side than the front group GF, the zoom optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (21). Here, the focal length of the anti-vibration group is set to f1S. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (21) not less than the lower limit, it is advantageous to shorten the total optical length. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (21) not more than the upper limit, the refractive power of the anti-vibration group can be ensured, so it is easy to suppress the movement of the anti-vibration group during image shake correction, which is advantageous for miniaturization.

[0304] 0.07<|fIS / ft|<0.5 (21)

[0305] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of the conditional expression (21) to either 0.09 or 0.1 instead of 0.07. Furthermore, it is preferable to set the upper limit of the conditional expression (21) to either 0.5 to either 0.4 or 0.35.

[0306] In a structure in which the front group GF includes a joined lens formed by joining a negative meniscus lens with a convex surface toward the object side and a positive lens with a convex surface toward the object side in sequence from the object side, the variable power optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional formula (22). Here, the refractive index of the negative meniscus lens included in the front group GF relative to the d-line is set to Ndn. The Abbe number of the d-line reference of the negative meniscus lens included in the front group GF is set to vdn. By making the corresponding value of the conditional formula (22) not below the lower limit, it is possible to select materials other than materials with low refractive index and low Abbe number, so it is easy to correct the chromatic aberration of magnification at the wide-angle end. By making the corresponding value of the conditional formula (22) not above the upper limit, it is possible to select materials other than materials with high refractive index and high Abbe number, so it is possible to select materials with low specific gravity, which is easy to lighten. In addition, since the difference in the Abbe number between the positive lens and the negative lens constituting the front group GF will not become too small, the refractive power of each lens constituting the front group GF will not become strong. As a result, it is easy to correct the high-order aberration of spherical aberration at the telephoto end. In this specification, "high order" regarding aberrations refers to 5th order or higher.

[0307] 1.94<Ndn+0.01×vdn<2.5 (22)

[0308] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of conditional expression (22) to either 2 or 2.04 instead of 1.94. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of conditional expression (22) to either 2.35 or 2.3 instead of 2.5.

[0309] In a structure in which the front group GF includes a joined lens formed by joining a negative meniscus lens with a convex surface toward the object side and a positive lens with a convex surface toward the object side in sequence from the object side, the variable power optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional formula (23). Here, the refractive index of the positive lens included in the front group GF relative to the d-line is set to Ndp. The Abbe number of the d-line reference of the positive lens included in the front group GF is set to vdp. By making the corresponding value of the conditional formula (23) not below the lower limit, it is possible to select materials other than materials with low refractive index and low Abbe number, so that the increase of high-order aberrations of spherical aberration at the telephoto end can be suppressed, thereby facilitating high performance. In addition, it is possible to suppress the axial chromatic aberration at the telephoto end from becoming undercorrected. By making the corresponding value of the conditional formula (23) not above the upper limit, it is possible to select materials other than materials with high refractive index and high Abbe number, so that materials with low specific gravity can be selected, so that it is easy to reduce weight. In addition, it is possible to suppress the axial chromatic aberration at the telephoto end from becoming overcorrected.

[0310] 2<Ndp+0.01×vdp<2.6 (23)

[0311] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of the conditional expression (23) to either 2.1 or 2.16 instead of 2. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of the conditional expression (23) to either 2.6 to either 2.45 or 2.4.

[0312] When the average value of the Abbe numbers of the d-line reference of all positive lenses in the front group GF is set to vdFp_ave, the variable power optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (24). By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (24) not less than the lower limit, it is particularly advantageous to correct the axial chromatic aberration at the telephoto end. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (24) not more than the upper limit, it is advantageous to correct various aberrations except chromatic aberration.

[0313] 55<vdFp_ave<95 (24)

[0314] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of conditional expression (24) to either 60 or 63 instead of 55. Furthermore, it is preferable to set the upper limit of conditional expression (24) to either 90 or 88.5 instead of 95.

[0315] When the thickness of the lens group on the most object side of the front group GF on the optical axis is dF1, the variable power optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional expression (25). Figure 2 The thickness dF1 is shown in FIG. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (25) not less than the lower limit, it is advantageous to ensure the strength of the lens group closest to the object side of the front group GF. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (25) not more than the upper limit, it is advantageous to reduce the weight of the front group GF.

[0316] 0.03<dF1 / fF1<0.35 (25)

[0317] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of conditional expression (25) to either 0.035 or 0.04 instead of 0.03. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of conditional expression (25) to either 0.3 or 0.27 instead of 0.35.

[0318] When the average value of the specific gravity of all lenses in the front group GF is set to GFave, the zoom optical system preferably satisfies the following conditional formula (26). By making the corresponding value of conditional formula (26) not less than the lower limit, it is possible to use a material with high availability, which is conducive to realizing a zoom optical system in which spherical aberration and axial chromatic aberration are suppressed. By making the corresponding value of conditional formula (26) not more than the upper limit, it is conducive to lightweighting of the front group GF.

[0319] 2<GFave<4.3 (26)

[0320] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of the conditional expression (26) to either 2.5 or 2.75 instead of 2. Furthermore, it is preferable to set the upper limit of the conditional expression (26) to either 4 or 3.7 instead of 4.3.

[0321] in addition, Figure 1 The example shown is only an example, and various modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the technical purpose of the present invention. For example, the number of lens groups included in each of the front group GF, the middle group GM, and the rear group GR, the number of lenses included in each lens group, the number of lenses included in the anti-vibration group, and the number of lenses included in the focus group can be set to the same Figure 1 The lens group corresponding to the anti-vibration group and the lens group corresponding to the focus group may also be set to be different from the example. Figure 1 Examples of different groups. Figure 1 Although an example in which the variable power optical system is a zoom lens is shown, the variable power optical system of the present invention may be a zoom lens or a variable focal length lens.

[0322] exist Figure 1 In the example of the embodiment, the zoom optical system includes only one focus group, but the zoom optical system of the present invention may include multiple focus groups, for example, two focus groups. When the two focus groups are arranged in the rear group GR, the movement of each focus group during focusing can be suppressed. When the one or more focus groups included in the zoom optical system are arranged only in the rear group GR, the breathing effect caused by focusing can be suppressed.

[0323] The lens group that does not move during zooming can be set to Figure 1 For example, different lens groups may be used, or all lens groups may be moved when zooming. For example, at least one lens group that does not move when zooming may be arranged between the lens groups closest to the image side of the front group GF and the rear group GR. In such a configuration, the cams for moving the lens groups can be reduced, so the drive mechanism of the lens can be simplified.

[0324] The front group GF may be composed of two lens groups. This configuration is advantageous in suppressing aberration fluctuations during zooming.

[0325] The middle group GM may be configured to include two lens groups. In the case of such a configuration, it is advantageous to suppress aberration fluctuations during zooming.

[0326] The rear group GR may be composed of three lens groups, four lens groups, five lens groups, or six lens groups. By setting the number of lens groups that constitute the rear group GR to four or more, it is easy to suppress aberration changes during zooming. More specifically, the rear group GR may be composed, for example, as follows.

[0327] The rear group GR may be configured to include, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, and a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power. In this way, by limiting the number of lens groups included in the rear group GR to three, the total optical length can be easily shortened.

[0328] In a structure in which the rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, and a third subsequent lens group GR3, the variable power optical system preferably satisfies at least one of the following conditional expressions (27) and (28). In conditional expressions (27) and (28), the symbols are defined as follows. The focal length of the first subsequent lens group GR1 is set to fR1. The focal length of the second subsequent lens group GR2 is set to fR2. The focal length of the third subsequent lens group GR3 is set to fR3.

[0329] 0.05<fR1 / fR3<0.6 (27)

[0330] 0.2<fR1 / (-fR2)<1 (28)

[0331] By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (27) not less than the lower limit, the refractive power of the first subsequent lens group GR1 will not become too strong, which is conducive to suppressing the overcorrection of spherical aberration at the telephoto end. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (27) not more than the upper limit, the positive refractive power of the third subsequent lens group GR3 will not become too strong, which is conducive to ensuring an appropriate length of back focus.

[0332] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.05 of conditional expression (27) to any one of 0.08, 0.1, 0.12 and 0.14. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of 0.6 of conditional expression (27) to any one of 0.5, 0.45, 0.4 and 0.35.

[0333] By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (28) not less than the lower limit, the refractive power of the second subsequent lens group GR2 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the aberration change during zooming. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (28) not more than the upper limit, the refractive power of the first subsequent lens group GR1 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the spherical aberration at the telephoto end.

[0334] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.2 in conditional expression (28) to any one of 0.3, 0.4, 0.45 and 0.5. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of 1 in conditional expression (28) to any one of 0.9, 0.8, 0.75 and 0.7.

[0335] Alternatively, the rear group GR may be configured to include, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, and a third subsequent lens group GR3 having negative refractive power. In this way, by limiting the number of lens groups included in the rear group GR to three, it is easy to shorten the total optical length.

[0336] In a structure in which the rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, and a third subsequent lens group GR3 having negative refractive power, the variable power optical system preferably satisfies at least one of the following conditional expressions (29) and (30). In conditional expressions (29) and (30), symbols are defined as follows. The focal length of the first subsequent lens group GR1 is set to fR1. The focal length of the second subsequent lens group GR2 is set to fR2. The focal length of the third subsequent lens group GR3 is set to fR3.

[0337] 0.5<fR1 / (-fR3)<1.6 (29)

[0338] 0.8<fR2 / (-fR3)<3 (30)

[0339] By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (29) not less than the lower limit, the refractive power of the third subsequent lens group GR3 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the aberration change during zooming. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (29) not more than the upper limit, the refractive power of the first subsequent lens group GR1 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the spherical aberration at the telephoto end.

[0340] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.5 of conditional expression (29) to any one of 0.6, 0.7, 0.8 and 0.9, and it is preferable to set the upper limit of 1.6 of conditional expression (29) to any one of 1.5, 1.4, 1.3 and 1.2.

[0341] By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (30) not below the lower limit, the refractive power of the third subsequent lens group GR3 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the aberration change during zooming. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (30) not above the upper limit, the refractive power of the second subsequent lens group GR2 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the spherical aberration at the telephoto end.

[0342] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.8 of the conditional expression (30) to any one of 1, 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of 3 of the conditional expression (30) to any one of 2.5, 2.2, 2 and 1.8.

[0343] Alternatively, as shown in the embodiment described later, the rear group GR may also be configured to include at least a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having negative refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having positive refractive power in order from the object side to the image side. In this way, by having the rear group GR include at least four lens groups, it is easy to suppress aberration changes during zooming.

[0344] In a structure in which the rear group GR includes, in order from the object side to the image side, at least the 1st subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, the 2nd subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, the 3rd subsequent lens group GR3 having negative refractive power, and the 4th subsequent lens group GR4 having positive refractive power, the variable power optical system preferably satisfies at least one of the following conditional expressions (29A), (30A), (31), and (32). In conditional expressions (29A), (30A), (31), and (32), the symbols are defined as follows. Set the focal length of the 1st subsequent lens group GR1 to fR1. Set the focal length of the 2nd subsequent lens group GR2 to fR2. Set the focal length of the 3rd subsequent lens group GR3 to fR3. Set the focal length of the 4th subsequent lens group GR4 to fR4.

[0345] 0.9<fR1 / (-fR3)<10 (29A)

[0346] 0.1<fR2 / (-fR3)<1.8 (30A)

[0347] 1.2<fR1 / fR2<11 (31)

[0348] 0.1<fR2 / fR4<1.5 (32)

[0349] By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (29A) not less than the lower limit, the refractive power of the third subsequent lens group GR3 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the aberration change during zooming. By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (29A) not more than the upper limit, the refractive power of the first subsequent lens group GR1 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the spherical aberration at the telephoto end.

[0350] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.9 of conditional expression (29A) to any one of 1, 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of 10 of conditional expression (29A) to any one of 8, 6, 4.5 and 3.

[0351] By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (30A) not below the lower limit, the refractive power of the third subsequent lens group GR3 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the aberration change during zooming. By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (30A) not above the upper limit, the refractive power of the second subsequent lens group GR2 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the spherical aberration at the telephoto end.

[0352] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set any one of 0.2, 0.3, 0.35 and 0.4 instead of 0.1, which is the lower limit of conditional expression (30A). It is also preferable to set any one of 1.5, 1.3, 1.1 and 0.95 instead of 1.8, which is the upper limit of conditional expression (30A).

[0353] By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (31) not below the lower limit, the refractive power of the second subsequent lens group GR2 will not become too weak, which is conducive to correcting the spherical aberration at the telephoto end. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (31) not above the upper limit, the refractive power of the first subsequent lens group GR1 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the aberration change when changing the magnification.

[0354] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of conditional expression (31) to 1.2, which is any one of 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, and 1.6. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of conditional expression (31) to 11, which is any one of 9, 7, 5, and 3.

[0355] By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (32) not less than the lower limit, the refractive power of the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 will not become too weak, thereby preventing undercorrection of aberrations during zooming. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (32) not more than the upper limit, the refractive power of the fourth lens group GR4 will not become too strong, thereby preventing overcorrection of aberrations during zooming.

[0356] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set any one of 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 and 0.45 instead of 0.1, which is the lower limit of conditional expression (32). Also, it is preferable to set any one of 1.3, 1.2, 1.1 and 1 instead of 1.5, which is the upper limit of conditional expression (32).

[0357] The rear group GR may also be configured to include at least the first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, the second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, the third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, and the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power in order from the object side to the image side. In this way, by having the rear group GR include at least four lens groups, it is easy to suppress aberration changes during zooming.

[0358] In a structure in which the rear group GR includes at least the first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, the second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, the third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, and the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power in order from the object side to the image side, the variable power optical system preferably satisfies at least one of the following conditional equations (27A) and (32A). In conditional equations (27A) and (32A), the symbols are defined as follows. Set the focal length of the first subsequent lens group GR1 to fR1. Set the focal length of the second subsequent lens group GR2 to fR2. Set the focal length of the third subsequent lens group GR3 to fR3. Set the focal length of the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 to fR4.

[0359] 0.25<fR1 / fR3<6 (27A)

[0360] 0.4<fR2 / fR4<18 (32A)

[0361] By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (27A) not less than the lower limit, the refractive power of the first subsequent lens group GR1 will not become too strong, which is conducive to suppressing the overcorrection of spherical aberration at the telephoto end. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (27A) not more than the upper limit, the positive refractive power of the third subsequent lens group GR3 will not become too strong, which is conducive to ensuring an appropriate length of back focus.

[0362] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set any one of 0.4, 0.45, 0.5 and 0.55 instead of 0.25, which is the lower limit of conditional expression (27A). Furthermore, it is preferable to set any one of 5, 4, 3.4 and 2.9 instead of 6, which is the upper limit of conditional expression (27A).

[0363] By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (32A) not below the lower limit, the refractive power of the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 will not become too weak, thereby preventing undercorrection of aberrations during zooming. By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (32A) not above the upper limit, the refractive power of the fourth lens group GR4 will not become too strong, thereby preventing overcorrection of aberrations during zooming.

[0364] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set any one of 0.6, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9 and 0.95 instead of 0.4, which is the lower limit of conditional expression (32A). Also, it is preferable to set any one of 13, 8, 7, 6 and 5 instead of 18, which is the upper limit of conditional expression (32A).

[0365] As shown in the embodiments described later, the rear group GR may be constructed to include, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power, a fifth subsequent lens group GR5 having positive refractive power, and a sixth subsequent lens group GR6 having negative refractive power. In this way, by configuring the rear group GR to include six lens groups, it is easy to suppress aberration changes during zooming.

[0366] In a structure in which the rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power, a fifth subsequent lens group GR5 having positive refractive power, and a sixth subsequent lens group GR6 having negative refractive power, the variable power optical system preferably satisfies at least one of the following conditional expressions (33) and (34). In conditional expressions (33) and (34), the symbols are defined as follows. Set the focal length of the third subsequent lens group GR3 to fR3. Set the focal length of the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 to fR4. Set the focal length of the fifth subsequent lens group GR5 to fR5. Set the focal length of the sixth subsequent lens group GR6 to fR6.

[0367] 0.2<fR3 / fR5<2.5 (33)

[0368] 0.04<fR4 / fR6<4 (34)

[0369] By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (33) not less than the lower limit, the refractive power of the fifth subsequent lens group GR5 will not become too weak, which is conducive to correcting distortion aberration. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (33) not more than the upper limit, the refractive power of the third subsequent lens group GR3 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing spherical aberration at the wide-angle end.

[0370] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.2 of the conditional expression (33) to any one of 0.25, 0.32 and 0.35. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of 2.5 of the conditional expression (33) to any one of 2.1, 1.7 and 1.5.

[0371] By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (34) not below the lower limit, the refractive power of the sixth subsequent lens group GR6 will not become too weak, which is conducive to correcting distortion aberration. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (34) not above the upper limit, the refractive power of the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 will not become too weak, which is conducive to correcting aberrations during zooming.

[0372] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.04 of the conditional expression (34) to any one of 0.2, 0.6 and 0.8. Also, it is preferable to set the upper limit of 4 of the conditional expression (34) to any one of 3.4, 2.8 and 2.2.

[0373] The rear group GR may also be configured to include at least the first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, the second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, the third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, and the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power in order from the object side to the image side. In this way, by having the rear group GR include at least four lens groups, it is easy to suppress aberration changes during zooming.

[0374] In a structure in which the rear group GR includes, in order from the object side to the image side, at least a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power, the variable power optical system preferably satisfies at least one of the following conditional expressions (31A), (35), and (36). In conditional expressions (31A), (35), and (36), the symbols are defined as follows. Set the focal length of the first subsequent lens group GR1 to fR1. Set the focal length of the second subsequent lens group GR2 to fR2. Set the focal length of the third subsequent lens group GR3 to fR3. Set the focal length of the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 to fR4.

[0375] 0.06<fR1 / fR2<0.7 (31A)

[0376] 0.5<fR2 / fR3<11 (35)

[0377] 0.2<fR3 / (-fR4)<3 (36)

[0378] By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (31A) not below the lower limit, the refractive power of the second subsequent lens group GR2 will not become too weak, which is conducive to correcting the spherical aberration at the telephoto end. By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (31A) not above the upper limit, the refractive power of the first subsequent lens group GR1 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the aberration change when changing the magnification.

[0379] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.06 of the conditional expression (31A) to any one of 0.1, 0.12, 0.14 and 0.16. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of 0.7 of the conditional expression (31A) to any one of 0.6, 0.5, 0.4 and 0.36.

[0380] By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (35) not below the lower limit, the refractive power of the third subsequent lens group GR3 will not become too weak, which is conducive to correcting the spherical aberration at the telephoto end. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (35) not above the upper limit, the refractive power of the second subsequent lens group GR2 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the aberration change when changing the magnification.

[0381] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.5 of the conditional expression (35) to any one of 1, 1.3, 1.6 and 1.7. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of 11 of the conditional expression (35) to any one of 9, 8, 7 and 6.7.

[0382] By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (36) not less than the lower limit, the refractive power of the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the aberration change during zooming. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (36) not more than the upper limit, the refractive power of the third subsequent lens group GR3 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the spherical aberration at the telephoto end.

[0383] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to replace the lower limit of 0.2 of the conditional expression (36) with any one of 0.4, 0.6, 0.8 and 1. It is also preferable to replace the upper limit of 3 of the conditional expression (36) with any one of 2, 1.8, 1.4 and 1.3.

[0384] The rear group GR may also be configured to include, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having negative refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power. In this way, by configuring the rear group GR to include four lens groups, it is easy to suppress aberration changes during zooming.

[0385] In a structure in which the rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having negative refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power, the variable power optical system preferably satisfies at least one of the following conditional expressions (31B) and (37). In conditional expressions (31B) and (37), the symbols are defined as follows. The focal length of the first subsequent lens group GR1 is set to fR1. The focal length of the second subsequent lens group GR2 is set to fR2. The focal length of the third subsequent lens group GR3 is set to fR3. The focal length of the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 is set to fR4.

[0386] 0.6<fR1 / fR2<4 (31B)

[0387] 0.05<fR3 / fR4<1 (37)

[0388] By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (31B) not below the lower limit, the refractive power of the second subsequent lens group GR2 will not become too weak, which is conducive to correcting the spherical aberration at the telephoto end. By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (31B) not above the upper limit, the refractive power of the first subsequent lens group GR1 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the aberration change when changing the magnification.

[0389] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.6 of the conditional expression (31B) to any one of 0.9, 1.1, 1.3 and 1.4. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of 4 of the conditional expression (31B) to any one of 3, 2.5, 2.2 and 1.9.

[0390] By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (37) not below the lower limit, the refractive power of the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 will not become too weak, which is conducive to correcting distortion aberration. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (37) not above the upper limit, the refractive power of the third subsequent lens group GR3 will not become too weak, which is conducive to correcting aberrations during zooming.

[0391] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.05 of conditional expression (37) to any one of 0.1, 0.15, 0.18 and 0.2. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of 1 of conditional expression (37) to any one of 0.7, 0.5, 0.35 and 0.3.

[0392] The rear group GR may also be configured to include at least a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, and a third subsequent lens group GR3 having negative refractive power in order from the object side to the image side. In this way, by including at least three lens groups in the rear group GR, it is easy to suppress aberration changes during zooming.

[0393] In a structure in which the rear group GR includes at least a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, and a third subsequent lens group GR3 having negative refractive power in order from the object side to the image side, the variable power optical system preferably satisfies at least one of the following conditional expressions (28A) and (35A). In conditional expressions (28A) and (35A), the symbols are defined as follows. The focal length of the first subsequent lens group GR1 is set to fR1. The focal length of the second subsequent lens group GR2 is set to fR2. The focal length of the third subsequent lens group GR3 is set to fR3.

[0394] 0.2<fR1 / (-fR2)<1 (28A)

[0395] 0.2<fR2 / fR3<1 (35A)

[0396] By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (28A) not less than the lower limit, the refractive power of the second subsequent lens group GR2 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the aberration change during zooming. By making the corresponding value of conditional expression (28A) not more than the upper limit, the refractive power of the first subsequent lens group GR1 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the spherical aberration at the telephoto end.

[0397] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.2 of the conditional expression (28A) to any one of 0.3, 0.4, 0.45 and 0.5. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of 1 of the conditional expression (28A) to any one of 0.9, 0.8, 0.75 and 0.7.

[0398] By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (35A) not below the lower limit, the refractive power of the third subsequent lens group GR3 will not become too weak, which is conducive to correcting the spherical aberration at the telephoto end. By making the corresponding value of the conditional expression (35A) not above the upper limit, the refractive power of the second subsequent lens group GR2 will not become too weak, which is conducive to suppressing the aberration change when changing the magnification.

[0399] In order to obtain better characteristics, it is preferable to set the lower limit of 0.2 of the conditional expression (35A) to any one of 0.3, 0.4, 0.45 and 0.5. It is also preferable to set the upper limit of 1 of the conditional expression (35A) to any one of 0.9, 0.8, 0.75 and 0.7.

[0400] The rear group GR may be configured to include an Lp1 lens having positive refractive power and an Ln1 lens having negative refractive power and arranged adjacent to the image side of the Lp1 lens. Then, the image side surface of the Lp1 lens may be configured to be an aspherical surface shape in which the refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is more negatively displaced than the refractive power in the paraxial region. The object side surface of the Ln1 lens may be configured to be an aspherical surface shape in which the refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is more positively displaced than the refractive power in the paraxial region. By configuring such an Lp1 lens and an Ln1 lens in the rear group GR, it is advantageous to suppress the change of astigmatism during zooming.

[0401] The rear group GR may be configured to include an Ln2 lens having negative refractive power and an Lp2 lens having positive refractive power and arranged adjacent to the image side of the Ln2 lens. Then, the surface on the object side of the Ln2 lens may be configured to be an aspherical surface shape in which the refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is more negatively displaced than the refractive power in the paraxial region. The surface on the image side of the Ln2 lens may be configured to be an aspherical surface shape in which the refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is more positively displaced than the refractive power in the paraxial region. By configuring such an Ln2 lens and an Lp2 lens in the rear group GR, it is advantageous to suppress the change of astigmatism during zooming.

[0402] refer to Figure 3 , the above-mentioned “position of the maximum effective diameter” is explained. Figure 3 This is a diagram for illustration purposes. Figure 3 In the figure, the left side is the object side and the right side is the image side. Figure 3 The on-axis beam Xa and the off-axis beam Xb passing through the lens Lx are shown in FIG. Figure 3 In the example, the light ray Xb1, which is the upper light ray of the off-axis light beam Xb, is the light ray passing through the outermost side. The "outer side" mentioned here refers to the radial outer side centered on the optical axis Z, that is, the side away from the optical axis Z. In this specification, the position of the intersection of the light ray passing through the outermost side and the lens surface is the position Px of the maximum effective diameter. And, twice the distance from the position Px of the maximum effective diameter to the optical axis Z becomes the effective diameter ED of the object side surface of the lens Lx. In addition, in Figure 3 In the example of FIG. 1 , the upper ray of the off-axis beam Xb is the ray that passes the outermost side. However, which ray becomes the ray that passes the outermost side varies depending on the optical system.

[0403] The above-mentioned “the refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is more negatively shifted than the refractive power in the paraxial region” has the following meanings based on the sign of the refractive power. When the surface has negative refractive power at both the paraxial region and the position of the maximum effective diameter, it means that the surface has a stronger negative refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter than the paraxial region. When the surface has positive refractive power at both the paraxial region and the position of the maximum effective diameter, it means that the surface has a weaker positive refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter than the paraxial region. When the surface has refractive powers of different signs at the paraxial region and the position of the maximum effective diameter, it means that the paraxial region has positive refractive power and the position of the maximum effective diameter has negative refractive power.

[0404] Similarly, the above-mentioned "the refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is more shifted in the positive direction compared to the refractive power in the paraxial region" has the following meanings based on the sign of the refractive power. When the surface has positive refractive power at both the paraxial region and the position of the maximum effective diameter, it means that the surface has a stronger positive refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter than the paraxial region. When the surface has negative refractive power at both the paraxial region and the position of the maximum effective diameter, it means that the surface has a weaker negative refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter than the paraxial region. When the surface has refractive powers of different signs at the paraxial region and the position of the maximum effective diameter, it means that the paraxial region has a negative refractive power and the position of the maximum effective diameter has a positive refractive power.

[0405] The above-mentioned preferred structures and possible structures may be arbitrarily combined within the scope of no contradiction, and are preferably appropriately and selectively adopted according to the required specifications.

[0406] As an example, a preferred embodiment of the zoom optical system of the present invention includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM and a rear group GR, wherein the front group GF includes no more than two lens groups with positive refractive power, the middle group GM includes no more than two lens groups with negative refractive power, the rear group GR includes multiple lens groups, and the lens group on the object side of the rear group GR has positive refractive power. When the zoom is changed, the lens group on the object side of the front group GF moves, and all intervals between adjacent lens groups change, satisfying the above-mentioned conditional expressions (1), (2) and (3).

[0407] Next, embodiments of the variable magnification optical system of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. In addition, the reference symbols marked on each group in the cross-sectional view of each embodiment are used independently in each embodiment to avoid the complication of the description and drawings caused by the increase in the number of digits of the reference symbols. Therefore, even if the same reference symbols are marked in the drawings of different embodiments, they are not necessarily the same structure.

[0408] [Example 1]

[0409] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 1 are shown in Figure 1 The illustration method and structure are as described above, so some repeated descriptions are omitted here. The variable power optical system of Example 1 includes a front group GF, a middle group GM and a rear group GR in sequence from the object side to the image side. The front group GF includes a lens group with positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes a lens group with negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes a first subsequent lens group GR1 with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 with negative refractive power and a third subsequent lens group GR3 with positive refractive power in sequence from the object side to the image side.

[0410] When zooming from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the third subsequent lens group GR3 is fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes only one focusing group. The focusing group includes the second subsequent lens group GR2. When focusing from an infinitely distant object to the closest object, the second subsequent lens group GR2 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0411] Regarding the variable power optical system of Example 1, basic lens data are shown in Table 1, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 2, and aspheric surface coefficients are shown in Table 3.

[0412] The following is a table of basic lens data. The Sn column shows the surface numbers when the surface closest to the object side is set as the first surface and the numbers are increased one by one toward the image side. The R column shows the radius of curvature of each surface. The D column shows the surface spacing on the optical axis between each surface and the surface adjacent to its image side. The Nd column shows the refractive index of each lens with respect to the d-line. The vd column shows the Abbe number of each lens based on the d-line. The 0gF column shows the partial dispersion ratio between the g-line and the F-line of each lens. The ρ column shows the specific gravity of each lens of the front group GF, and the record is omitted for other lenses.

[0413] When the refractive indexes of a certain lens with respect to the g-line, F-line and C-line are respectively Ng, NF and NC and the partial dispersion ratio between the g-line and F-line of the lens is θgF, θgF is defined by the following equation.

[0414] θgF=(Ng-NF) / (NF-NC)

[0415] The "d line", "C line", "F line" and "g line" recorded in this specification are bright lines, the wavelength of the d line is considered to be 587.56nm (nanometers), the wavelength of the C line is considered to be 656.27nm (nanometers), the wavelength of the F line is considered to be 486.13nm (nanometers), and the wavelength of the g line is considered to be 435.84nm (nanometers).

[0416] In the table of basic lens data, the sign of the radius of curvature of the surface that makes the convex shape face the object side is set to positive, and the sign of the radius of curvature of the surface that makes the convex shape face the image side is set to negative. In Table 1, the surface number and the term (St) are marked in the surface number column corresponding to the aperture stop St. The value at the bottom of the D column in the table is the interval between the surface closest to the image side in the table and the image surface Sim. Regarding the variable surface interval when changing magnification, the symbol DD[] is used, and the surface number on the object side of the interval is marked in [] and recorded in the surface interval column.

[0417] In Table 2, the zoom ratio Zr, focal length f, back focal length Bf, open F value FNo., maximum full angle of view 2ω, and variable surface interval are shown based on the d-line reference. When the zoom optical system is a zoom lens, the zoom ratio has the same meaning as the zoom factor. The [°] in the 2ω column indicates the unit is degree. In Table 2, the values ​​of the wide-angle end state, the middle focal length state, and the telephoto end state are shown in the columns marked "Wide", "Midd]e", and "Tele", respectively.

[0418] In the basic lens data, the surface number of the aspheric surface is marked with an * mark, and the value of the paraxial curvature radius is recorded in the curvature radius column of the aspheric surface. In Table 3, the surface number of the aspheric surface is shown in the Sn row, and the numerical values ​​of the aspheric coefficients of each aspheric surface are shown in the KA and Am rows. In addition, m in Am is an integer greater than 3 and varies depending on the surface. For example, on the 6th surface of Example 1, m = 3, 4, 5, ..., 16. The numerical values ​​of the aspheric coefficients in Table 3 "E±n" (n: integer) mean "×10 ±n KA and Am are aspherical coefficients in the aspherical formula represented by the following formula.

[0419] Zd=C×h 2 / {1+(1-KA×C 2 ×h 2 ) 1 / 2}+∑Am×h m

[0420] in,

[0421] Zd: depth of aspheric surface (the length of the perpendicular line from a point on the aspheric surface at height h to a plane tangent to the vertex of the aspheric surface and perpendicular to the optical axis Z);

[0422] h: height (the distance from the optical axis Z to the lens surface);

[0423] C: the reciprocal of the paraxial curvature radius;

[0424] KA, Am: Aspheric coefficients,

[0425] Σ in the aspherical expression represents the sum related to m.

[0426] In the data of each table, degrees are used as the unit of angle and millimeters are used as the unit of length, but since the optical system can be used at either a magnified or reduced scale, other appropriate units can also be used. In addition, in each table shown below, the values ​​rounded to a predetermined number of digits are recorded.

[0427] [Table 1]

[0428] Example 1

[0429] Sn R D Nd vd θgF ρ 1 55.5534 1.5000 1.84666 23.78 0.62054 3.54 2 40.0897 11.3046 1.49700 81.54 0.53748 3.62 3 -349.6824 0.1000 4 47.9336 4.8273 1.51680 64.20 0.53430 2.52 5 117.9072 DD[5] *6 136.2484 1.0000 1.85400 40.38 0.56890 *7 14.8432 5.2402 8 -31.4167 0.4478 1.61772 49.81 0.56035 9 18.0372 3.4606 1.92286 18.90 0.64960 10 -58.0571 1.3100 11 -19.1053 1.0198 1.92286 18.90 0.64960 12 -43.3890 DD

[12] 13(St) ∞ 2.2110 *14 36.8272 2.7948 1.76450 49.10 0.55289 *15 -90.0800 1.7007 16 40.7013 0.8000 1.77535 50.31 0.55042 17 16.5284 4.4338 1.49700 81.54 0.53748 18 -90.9026 2.6247 19 416.0968 2.4655 1.49700 81.54 0.53748 20 -33.2145 0.4917 1.80100 34.97 0.58642 21 45.7661 8.2032 *22 24.5246 5.4224 1.43875 94.66 0.53402 *23 -19.8837 DD

[23] 24 64.9478 0.7166 1.59349 67.00 0.53667 25 19.1644 DD

[25] *26 3922.5042 2.8352 1.59201 67.02 0.53589 *27 -57.5374 19.3600

[0430] [Table 2]

[0431] Example 1

[0432] Wide Middle Tele Zr 1.0 2.2 4.2 f 30.35 66.83 127.48 Bf 19.36 19.36 19.36 FNo. 3.28 3.27 3.28 2ω[°] 49.4 21.8 11.6 DD[5] 1.79 24.85 34.68 DD

[12] 12.63 5.77 0.96 DD

[23] 11.33 12.83 6.72 DD

[25] 16.15 15.02 27.08

[0433] [Table 3]

[0434] Example 1

[0435] Sn 6 7 14 15 KA 1.0000000E+00 -1.4212062E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 A4 1.7274393E-06 6.3505309E-05 -6.9566048E-06 5.2394372E-06 A5 3.4734057E-06 2.4185730E-05 4.7824941E-06 -1.4270718E-06 A6 -4.2518997E-07 -7.2019980E-06 -3.5015495E-06 6.2739742E-07 A7 2.6132343E-08 9.7638596E-07 1.3650002E-06 -1.5194967E-07 A8 -1.4177316E-10 -2.5338595E-09 -2.8235297E-07 1.9675753E-08 A9 1.3739006E-10 -1.8039942E-08 2.3514308E-08 -1.7143545E-09 A10 -3.0240654E-11 2.5390390E-09 2.0274465E-09 6.4840437E-10 A11 1.6943480E-12 -1.6419491E-10 -5.9474474E-10 -1.8041703E-10 A12 1.7655243E-14 8.8596048E-12 2.1036723E-11 1.7819837E-11 A13 -7.4981812E-15 -3.4491241E-13 6.6706478E-12 4.8796135E-13 A14 1.8126092E-16 -5.2390114E-14 -9.6302064E-13 -2.3021184E-13 A15 1.0292348E-18 6.5552591E-15 5.2791930E-14 1.6693571E-14 A16 8.6295616E-19 -1.9259719E-16 -1.0855400E-15 -3.9891854E-16

[0436] Sn 22 23 26 27 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 A4 -2.7334208E-05 2.2424581E-05 6.9074863E-07 -1.1411382E-04 A5 5.4280614E-06 -4.1464924E-07 1.2464530E-07 1.8209297E-04 A6 -3.3076124E-06 3.0107169E-06 4.0217724E-08 -1.1610662E-04 A7 9.1070858E-07 -2.9541900E-06 -1.7217014E-09 4.0589974E-05 A8 -9.1645096E-08 1.2187762E-06 5.0320822E-11 -8.6479461E-06 A9 -4.1319717E-09 -2.5000760E-07 -4.1498897E-11 1.1607173E-06 A10 2.9692592E-10 2.1960563E-08 6.3351611E-12 -9.6496961E-08 A11 3.9125262E-10 5.9251628E-10 -7.4536569E-13 4.5971559E-09 A12 -4.9542030E-11 -2.4231131E-10 8.3555815E-14 -1.1157874E-10 A13 -4.6326061E-12 2.9953086E-12 -4.2416341E-15 3.9400346E-12 A14 1.4045523E-12 2.4833558E-12 2.4900182E-16 -4.4638651E-13 A15 -1.0922478E-13 -2.1985445E-13 -6.9361201E-18 2.3626899E-14 A16 2.9598634E-15 5.9782195E-15 -2.6200649E-20 -4.3013632E-16

[0437] exist Figure 4 , various aberration diagrams are shown for a state where the variable power optical system of Example 1 is focused on an object at infinity. Figure 4 In the figure, spherical aberration, astigmatism, distortion and chromatic aberration of magnification are shown from left to right. Figure 4 In the figure, the aberrations at the wide-angle end state are shown in the upper section marked with "Wide", the aberrations at the intermediate focal length state are shown in the middle section marked with "Middle", and the aberrations at the telephoto end state are shown in the lower section marked with "Tele". In the spherical aberration diagram, aberrations under the d-line, C-line and F-line are shown with solid lines, long dashed lines and short dashed lines, respectively. In the astigmatism diagram, aberrations under the d-line in the sagittal direction are shown with solid lines, and aberrations under the d-line in the meridional direction are shown with short dashed lines. In the distortion diagram, aberrations under the d-line are shown with solid lines. In the lateral chromatic aberration diagram, aberrations under the C-line and F-line are shown with long dashed lines and short dashed lines, respectively. In the spherical aberration diagram, the value of the open F value is shown after FNo.=. In the other aberration diagrams, the value of the maximum half viewing angle is shown after ω=.

[0438] Unless otherwise specified, the symbols, meanings, recording methods and graphical representation methods of various data related to the above-mentioned embodiment 1 are basically the same in the following embodiments, and therefore repeated descriptions are omitted below.

[0439] [Example 2]

[0440] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 2 are shown in FIG. Figure 5 . The variable power optical system of Example 2 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes, from the object side to the image side, a first front lens group CF1 having positive refractive power and a second front lens group GF2 having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes a lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, and a third subsequent lens group GR3 having negative refractive power.

[0441] When zooming from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, all lens groups change the intervals with adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes only one focusing group. The focusing group includes the second front lens group GF2. When focusing from an infinitely distant object to the closest object, the second front lens group GF2 moves toward the object side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0442] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 2, basic lens data is shown in Table 4, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 5, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 6, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 8. Figure 6 middle.

[0443] [Table 4]

[0444] Example 2

[0445] Sn R D Nd vd θgF ρ 1 457.6576 1.4464 1.80100 34.97 0.58642 3.55 2 83.2872 6.4013 1.49700 81.61 0.53887 3.70 3 -215.2210 0.1784 4 63.9962 5.4639 1.64000 60.08 0.53704 3.06 5 373.5993 DD[5] 6 60.5121 4.3052 1.67790 55.34 0.54726 4.01 7 -85.2421 1.2591 1.96300 24.11 0.62126 4.20 8 -815.1262 DD[8] *9 -107.1261 1.4547 1.85400 40.38 0.56890 *10 28.3530 2.8829 11 -85.0500 0.8289 1.72916 54.68 0.54451 12 28.9550 4.5108 1.89286 20.36 0.63944 13 -92.8411 DD

[13] 14(St) ∞ 4.0038 *15 -24.4022 1.5000 1.89190 37.13 0.57813 16 35.3320 6.8970 1.64000 60.08 0.53704 17 -27.4415 0.7011 *18 82.5314 4.1236 1.85400 40.38 0.56890 *19 -50.1936 DD

[19] 20 55.5066 1.6549 1.96300 24.11 0.62126 21 23.2399 6.1267 1.59522 67.73 0.54426 22 -54.4056 DD

[22] 23 -204.9164 2.1382 1.92286 18.90 0.64960 24 -58.4058 3.4889 *25 -49.6248 1.1592 1.83220 40.10 0.57151 *26 55.3801 DD

[26]

[0446] [Table 5]

[0447] Example 2

[0448] Wide Middle Tele Zr 1.0 1.7 2.7 f 51.01 88.41 137.26 Bf 13.42 24.68 46.47 FNo. 2.89 2.89 2.93 2ω[°] 31.4 17.8 11.6 DD[5] 8.97 45.55 56.61 DD[8] 3.48 1.18 1.67 DD

[13] 2.66 1.46 1.93 DD

[19] 8.41 4.32 2.11 DD

[22] 23.53 12.42 0.76 DD

[26] 13.42 24.68 46.47

[0449] [Table 6]

[0450] Example 2

[0451] Sn 9 10 15 18 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -9.9756003E-05 -1.1022639E-04 -2.7928458E-05 1.4836938E-05 A6 1.5669058E-06 1.6002720E-06 4.2802928E-07 -7.5749043E-08 A8 -1.2106731E-08 -1.0379660E-08 -7.0947841E-09 2.6029470E-11 A10 5.4060284E-12 -3.2355583E-11 6.8905124E-11 3.1347347E-13 A12 3.1014525E-13 4.6226298E-13 -7.5111273E-15 8.3824776E-15 A14 2.5449021E-15 1.4019800E-15 -6.7742660E-15 4.4322600E-17 A16 -3.3215443E-17 4.3089884E-17 3.8260718E-17 -5.0657473E-19 A18 -1.8321888E-20 -9.7762124E-19 1.5961166E-19 -9.9025122E-22 A20 6.6287431E-22 4.2367533E-21 -1.3188349E-21 1.1608603E-23

[0452] Sn 19 25 26 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 6.0185769E-06 -1.6268755E-05 -1.7262337E-05 A6 -1.7583141E-08 1.8875375E-07 2.0888080E-07 A8 1.1033637E-11 -7.7968992E-10 -1.5212457E-10 A10 -1.8293138E-12 3.3025600E-12 -2.0893335E-11 A12 8.5192741E-15 -1.5793413E-13 1.1145549E-13 A14 9.7409188E-17 1.2092404E-15 1.0218325E-15 A16 2.6490785E-19 1.6647106E-17 -2.1596437E-18 A18 -9.5717165E-21 -2.5355064E-19 -1.0876752E-19 A20 3.3580369E-23 9.2120906E-22 5.6420251E-22

[0453] [Example 3]

[0454] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 3 are shown in FIG. Figure 7 The variable power optical system of Example 3 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes one lens group having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes one lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power.

[0455] When zooming from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, all lens groups change the intervals with adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes only one focusing group. The focusing group includes the third subsequent lens group GR3. When focusing from an infinitely distant object to the closest object, the third subsequent lens group GR3 moves toward the object side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0456] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 3, basic lens data are shown in Table 7, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 8, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 9, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 10. Figure 8 middle.

[0457] [Table 7]

[0458] Example 3

[0459] Sn R D Nd vd θgF ρ 1 129.9837 1.3500 1.80610 33.34 0.59048 3.77 2 58.3690 8.5848 1.48749 70.32 0.52917 2.45 3 -407.2413 0.0498 4 54.0178 7.0751 1.51680 64.20 0.53430 2.52 5 609.0956 DD[5] 6 151.2407 0.8847 1.81600 46.62 0.55682 7 18.8560 0.2881 8 18.8908 2.9881 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 9 26.2930 5.0625 10 -35.8478 0.6025 1.77535 50.31 0.55042 11 -328.7179 DD

[11] 12(St) ∞ 0.0000 *13 48.6461 2.2192 1.80610 40.73 0.56940 *14 189.2664 0.0493 15 25.5417 3.4322 1.55200 70.70 0.54219 16 58.7118 DD

[16] 17 36.9450 0.6314 2.00100 29.14 0.59974 18 17.8548 6.7322 1.49700 81.54 0.53748 19 -98.8400 DD

[19] 20 -14.3196 0.5136 1.85150 40.78 0.56958 21 -27.4669 0.0483 22 27.0587 8.2655 1.49700 81.54 0.53748 23 -26.9071 0.3064 *24 -80.4852 3.6013 1.80610 40.73 0.56940 *25 -31.5835 DD

[25] 26 -49.6997 2.2481 2.00069 25.46 0.61402 27 -30.3504 1.0339 *28 -115.8196 1.7428 1.80610 40.73 0.56940 *29 -188.1213 3.9281 *30 -14.0662 0.5937 1.51633 64.06 0.53345 *31 82.1935 DD

[31]

[0460] [Table 8]

[0461] Example 3

[0462] Wide Middle Tele Zr 1.0 2.0 4.5 f 30.15 60.29 135.65 Bf 10.30 15.26 21.42 FNo. 2.89 2.88 2.88 2ω[°] 52.2 25.8 11.6 DD[5] 4.37 25.66 41.11 DD

[11] 21.27 13.09 2.51 DD

[16] 9.76 5.93 0.40 DD

[19] 7.09 15.78 30.71 DD

[25] 10.06 7.47 2.10 DD

[31] 10.30 15.26 21.42

[0463] [Table 9]

[0464] Example 3

[0465] Sn 13 14 24 25 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -1.5170200E-06 -2.3266057E-07 3.1880390E-05 5.4784374E-05 A6 4.9816730E-09 -8.7657800E-09 2.0827333E-07 2.0306251E-07 A8 -1.4558870E-09 -9.4028676E-10 1.7170188E-10 1.1634800E-09 A10 2.6288852E-11 1.6670909E-11 6.9423303E-12 1.0854022E-12 A12 -2.6759755E-13 -1.7580389E-13 -1.2437506E-13 -7.5516962E-14 A14 1.3262899E-15 8.8258511E-16 6.4701617E-16 6.9162741E-16 A16 -2.6696476E-18 -1.8028035E-18 -1.4520852E-18 -2.6682186E-18

[0466] Sn 28 29 30 31 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 4.4695208E-05 4.3667350E-05 6.2541011E-05 1.7405814E-05 A6 1.6885757E-07 4.0577596E-07 4.3086122E-07 -3.5614138E-08 A8 1.4397942E-10 4.2511459E-10 2.6057981E-09 -1.4517531E-10 A10 -8.0001768E-12 8.6616542E-12 -1.0997417E-11 1.2390218E-12 A12 7.3914040E-15 2.7543636E-15 6.3068758E-14 -1.0541448E-13 A14 -9.8529921E-16 -5.5648698E-16 -1.0283574E-16 6.8158346E-16 A16 2.4317860E-18 -5.9008895E-21 8.0068639E-18 -1.4777319E-18

[0467] [Example 4]

[0468] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 4 are shown in FIG. Fig. 9 . The variable power optical system of Example 4 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes one lens group having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes one lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having negative refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes the above-mentioned Lp1 lens and Ln1 lens.

[0469] When zooming from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the middle group GM is fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes only one focusing group. The focusing group includes the third subsequent lens group GR3. When focusing from an infinitely distant object to the closest object, the third subsequent lens group GR3 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0470] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 4, basic lens data is shown in Table 10, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 11, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 12, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 13. Fig.10The effective diameter of each surface of the Lp1 lens and the Ln1 lens is shown in the ED column of the table of basic lens data, and description of other lenses is omitted.

[0471] [Table 10]

[0472] Example 4

[0473] Sn R D Nd vd θgF ρ ED *1 70.4088 2.9813 1.67003 47.14 0.56262 3.57 *2 110.7284 0.1000 3 47.4123 1.8637 1.88300 40.69 0.56730 5.41 4 31.9715 10.4305 1.45860 90.19 0.53516 3.63 5 -1927.1021 DD[5] 6 -180.2454 0.5500 1.75500 52.32 0.54757 7 35.6368 2.1775 8 -94.0825 0.6138 1.77535 50.31 0.55042 9 17.7690 4.2929 1.90366 31.34 0.59636 10 90.4141 DD

[10] 11(St) ∞ 0.3729 12 37.6338 2.9167 1.64000 60.08 0.53704 13 -1877.5987 4.0594 14 1376.9227 1.3121 1.88300 39.22 0.57288 15 16.5563 8.8110 1.54814 45.78 0.56859 16 -20.1115 1.6497 17 -16.7555 0.9460 1.88300 39.22 0.57288 18 -47.6528 0.2340 19 37.1481 4.5177 1.85896 22.73 0.62844 20 -114.4725 DD

[20] 21 -110.4190 1.0756 1.96300 24.11 0.62126 22 26.4521 9.4176 1.49700 81.54 0.53748 23 -27.4038 0.0497 24 70.9933 4.1376 1.58913 61.13 0.54067 25 -56.8211 0.0498 26 37.1440 3.9309 1.49700 81.54 0.53748 27 -1128.3931 DD

[27] *28 -573.6576 0.6164 1.58913 61.15 0.53824 *29 22.9722 DD

[29] *30 58.8544 3.2890 1.82165 24.04 0.62380 22.763 *31 -114.5012 6.3879 22.046 *32 -12.8503 0.5903 1.58913 61.15 0.53824 21.386 *33 -45.0261 DD

[33] 22.687

[0474] [Table 11]

[0475] Example 4

[0476] Wide Middle Tele Zr 1.0 1.8 3.8 f 36.03 64.85 135.10 Bf 11.00 17.69 28.92 FNo. 2.89 2.89 2.89 2ω[°] 44.0 24.4 11.8 DD[5] 1.24 27.96 50.71 DD

[10] 6.48 4.41 1.77 DD

[20] 8.21 5.89 1.89 DD

[27] 12.40 8.68 2.91 DD

[29] 4.30 5.71 6.90 DD

[33] 11.00 17.69 28.92

[0477] [Table 12]

[0478] Example 4

[0479] Sn 1 2 30 31 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 A4 1.4584819E-06 1.4377124E-06 -1.8669221E-05 -2.2241610E-05 A5 -3.8022467E-09 3.9300482E-09 2.1507405E-06 5.2485976E-07 A6 6.6296947E-10 -6.9968037E-11 4.3294360E-08 1.5572635E-07 A7 -3.0979746E-12 9.0412198E-12 6.3711776E-09 -3.1983333E-09 A8 3.3136968E-15 4.1605201E-13 -1.7629091E-10 -7.0842111E-10 A9 2.1130859E-14 2.1693873E-14 6.6078467E-11 4.9364812E-11 A10 6.2404406E-16 -4.6431770E-17 -1.7476338E-12 9.1036183E-12 A11 -1.2160709E-17 -5.6619610E-17 1.9169576E-13 8.2909159E-13 A12 -4.5820174E-19 1.4263063E-18 1.1826884E-15 -3.1379295E-14 A13 1.8913404E-20 3.4579963E-21 3.5694170E-16 -2.4702699E-15 A14 -4.0627476E-22 8.8426582E-23 6.6842866E-17 -6.7083610E-17 A15 -2.8645950E-23 4.3045455E-23 1.2052030E-18 -1.3372283E-17 A16 3.5539631E-24 7.9649987E-25 8.1692474E-19 3.5574802E-18

[0480] Sn 28 29 32 33 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 -1.2051000E-01 1.0000000E+00 A3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 A4 3.5374137E-05 1.7567268E-05 2.2693675E-05 3.8430366E-05 A5 1.1632580E-06 1.8959462E-06 -7.4031268E-06 1.1365804E-07 A6 9.9028034E-09 7.8328617E-08 6.3358360E-07 -4.0676931E-07 A7 -3.3464097E-09 4.8592610E-09 -5.0403900E-09 7.7546804E-09 A8 -1.9144590E-10 3.3224539E-09 3.2732335E-09 1.0381769E-08 A9 -1.0966494E-10 -3.1839250E-10 6.9558535E-10 1.9841248E-11 A10 1.6799542E-11 -4.6337870E-11 -1.2846130E-10 -6.2814206E-11 A11 -6.5265500E-14 5.1231538E-12 2.7019034E-12 -1.1221915E-12 A12 -8.9618356E-14 -1.3227679E-13 1.4303156E-12 -2.8013555E-13 A13 -2.0102480E-15 4.3732179E-14 -1.0270450E-13 7.9200723E-15 A14 -1.0776130E-15 -2.1247865E-15 -7.5356890E-15 5.2644365E-15 A15 5.0892574E-17 -3.4481646E-16 -2.0937131E-16 -2.3000527E-16 A16 2.0334142E-17 1.6051371E-18 6.3987968E-17 2.2047115E-17 A17 -2.3883648E-19 -1.3574846E-18 1.0920633E-18 -3.9015864E-18 A18 -6.6898500E-20 2.5707043E-19 3.6682407E-19 3.7718700E-20 A19 -6.8582804E-21 3.6182669E-20 -3.7614078E-20 1.8079430E-20 A20 4.9072384E-22 -3.1535500E-21 6.8505442E-24 -6.8128749E-22

[0481] [Example 5]

[0482] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 5 are shown in FIG. Fig.11 . The variable power optical system of Example 5 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes one lens group having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes one lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having negative refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having positive refractive power. The rear group GR includes the above-mentioned Lp1 lens and Ln1 lens.

[0483] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the second subsequent lens group GR2 and the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 are fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes only one focusing group. The focusing group includes the third subsequent lens group GR3. When focusing from an infinitely distant object to the closest object, the third subsequent lens group GR3 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0484] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 5, basic lens data is shown in Table 13, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 14, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 15, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 16. Fig.12 The effective diameter of each surface of the Lp1 lens and the In1 lens is shown in the ED column of the basic lens data table.

[0485] [Table 13]

[0486] Example 5

[0487] Sn R D Nd vd θgF ρ ED 1 100.7706 2.0000 2.00069 25.46 0.61364 4.73 2 67.5894 6.7887 1.43700 95.10 0.53364 3.53 3 -282.0695 0.1000 4 69.7347 5.2809 1.51680 64.20 0.53430 2.52 5 759.3351 DD[5] *6 236.8488 0.8681 1.58313 59.38 0.54237 *7 60.5638 4.2596 8 -30.1803 0.5476 1.77535 50.31 0.55042 9 26.2585 2.3455 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 10 62.4645 DD

[10] 11(St) ∞ 0.6458 *12 45.9460 3.3410 1.49710 81.56 0.53848 *13 -56.3991 3.0514 14 -39.3895 1.1930 1.71736 29.52 0.60483 15 478.7121 0.2000 16 47.2813 3.5678 1.49700 81.61 0.53887 17 -57.4508 DD

[17] 18 245.9989 3.1031 1.71736 29.52 0.60483 19 -38.3884 0.0500 20 38.3994 4.7413 1.57099 50.80 0.55887 21 -27.9948 0.5325 1.92286 18.90 0.64960 22 -128.7755 DD

[22] 23 60.9230 2.1928 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 24 -232.5318 0.6654 1.88300 39.22 0.57288 25 19.2872 DD

[25] *26 263.5401 5.6625 1.49710 81.56 0.53848 19.800 *27 -21.1873 4.6094 19.812 *28 -11.4085 2.0922 1.58913 61.15 0.53824 19.814 *29 -22.1972 17.26 21.750

[0488] [Table 14]

[0489] Example 5

[0490] Wide Middle Tele Zr 1.0 2.1 3.5 f 38.58 81.01 135.02 Bf 17.26 17.26 17.26 FNo. 2.91 2.91 2.91 2ω[°] 41.6 19.0 11.4 DD[5] 3.00 34.71 53.68 DD

[10] 17.46 5.77 1.29 DD

[17] 5.67 2.99 0.17 DD

[22] 6.35 8.14 2.33 DD

[25] 8.44 6.64 12.45

[0491] [Table 15]

[0492] Example 5

[0493] Sn 6 7 12 13 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 3.1394087E-05 2.5539361E-05 7.6942284E-06 2.6061764E-05 A6 8.6654240E-08 1.1099355E-07 -1.6684332E-08 4.5324231E-08 A8 -1.1234866E-09 -7.9163642E-10 6.6262928E-09 1.4737766E-09 A10 2.0987593E-11 2.3383497E-12 -1.4871752E-10 2.2380560E-11 A12 -2.9073176E-13 1.3267426E-13 1.9215822E-12 -5.3932060E-13 A14 3.2635484E-15 -1.8945619E-15 -1.1310589E-14 -9.0191482E-16 A16 -2.2480154E-17 1.4770430E-17 1.6844548E-17 1.3744613E-16 A18 8.3222743E-20 -6.7229044E-20 8.1855078E-20 -1.4045700E-18 A20 -1.1756161E-22 1.6891185E-22 -6.9537914E-23 4.5691362E-21

[0494] Sn 26 27 28 29 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 1.6556388E-05 -1.2374354E-06 -1.7077607E-05 -5.2865387E-05 A6 2.3518453E-07 3.1126444E-07 2.7004826E-06 1.8072675E-06 A8 -2.0272497E-09 4.6096229E-09 -9.3978883E-09 -1.4175369E-08 A10 6.1173021E-11 -7.3008066E-11 -1.4878003E-10 -7.8616661E-12 A12 -5.3941920E-13 -5.7048188E-14 1.3234419E-12 6.1301675E-13 A14 2.4779953E-15 1.6086783E-14 2.4487584E-15 1.2372806E-15 A16 1.3908019E-17 -1.3305736E-16 1.8824186E-16 -5.3288630E-17 A18 -9.1050461E-20 1.5864089E-19 -3.1938648E-18 3.0059070E-19 A20 -5.6326024E-23 2.0965300E-21 1.2930878E-20 -6.4628137E-22

[0495] [Example 6]

[0496] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 6 are shown in FIG. Fig.13 The variable power optical system of Example 6 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes one lens group having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes one lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having negative refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having positive refractive power.

[0497] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, all lens groups change the intervals with adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes two focusing groups. The focusing group on the object side includes the second subsequent lens group GR2, and the focusing group on the image side includes the third subsequent lens group GR3. When focusing from an infinitely distant object to the closest object, the second subsequent lens group GR2 and the third subsequent lens group GR3 change their mutual intervals and move toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0498] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 6, basic lens data is shown in Table 16, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 17, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 18, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 19. Fig.14 middle.

[0499] [Table 16]

[0500] Example 6

[0501] Sn R D Nd vd θgF ρ 1 75.0456 1.2064 1.89286 20.36 0.63944 3.61 2 56.1044 5.6910 1.49700 81.54 0.53748 3.62 3 380.6415 0.0502 4 53.6120 5.5812 1.51680 64.20 0.53430 2.52 5 324.1823 DD[5] *6 68.6141 0.8751 1.58913 61.15 0.53824 *7 20.4793 4.6429 8 -49.3682 0.5557 1.60342 38.03 0.58356 9 30.4570 0.0491 10 30.1134 3.8758 1.89286 20.36 0.63944 11 -94.1195 3.8225 12 -19.9105 0.8096 1.83481 42.74 0.56490 13 -74.3528 DD

[13] 14(St) ∞ 0.7500 15 48.2790 3.2286 1.53775 74.70 0.53936 16 -126.2166 0.0500 17 33.5996 4.8012 1.49700 81.54 0.53748 18 -69.4674 0.6105 1.85478 24.80 0.61232 19 63.4200 4.8782 *20 -189.9858 1.0428 1.74320 49.29 0.55303 *21 -73.4358 0.1081 22 -85.6236 0.6807 1.67270 32.10 0.59891 23 84.4065 4.8457 1.55200 70.70 0.54219 24 -38.0286 0.3979 *25 55.5438 6.7176 1.61881 63.85 0.54182 *26 -28.6845 DD

[26] 27 64.7256 3.9890 1.89286 20.36 0.63944 28 -43.9046 0.8100 1.88300 39.22 0.57288 29 20.6978 DD

[29] *30 -48.1952 0.6114 1.68948 31.02 0.59874 *31 370.6816 DD

[31] 32 64.2691 4.0188 1.64000 60.08 0.53704 33 -106.0566 DD

[33]

[0502] [Table 17]

[0503] Example 6

[0504] Wide Middle Tele Zr 1.0 2.0 3.8 f 35.55 71.10 135.08 Bf 13.10 17.08 29.47 FNo. 2.89 2.88 2.88 2ω[°] 43.6 21.6 11.6 DD[5] 0.91 27.31 37.35 DD

[13] 19.82 10.05 2.00 DD

[26] 2.49 3.38 1.51 DD

[29] 22.46 16.57 6.60 DD

[31] 2.81 2.69 22.19 DD

[33] 13.10 17.08 29.47

[0505] [Table 18]

[0506] Example 6

[0507] Sn 6 7 20 21 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 1.3042174E-05 1.7501808E-06 -4.4348786E-05 -2.8370120E-06 A6 5.3756621E-08 7.9468643E-08 -1.5480643E-07 -1.5792614E-07 A8 1.2268976E-10 -7.6860792E-10 -7.1864602E-10 -9.7454163E-10 A10 -4.4846512E-12 1.0280854E-11 -5.5398100E-12 -1.4701865E-12 A12 6.3729927E-14 -3.9921458E-14 6.2925673E-14 4.6344606E-14 A14 -3.1953923E-16 6.6615047E-17 -8.2423520E-17 -6.0550395E-17 A16 6.1618239E-19 3.7832493E-19 -4.9276754E-21 -9.4596335E-20

[0508] Sn 25 26 30 31 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 1.4958767E-05 3.9641497E-06 1.6588939E-05 1.8304604E-05 A6 -2.2806888E-08 2.1823341E-08 -1.9192641E-08 -4.6981010E-08 A8 -4.1917738E-11 3.5604266E-11 -1.4992413E-09 -9.2687813E-10 A10 9.5622788E-14 -1.1848617E-14 7.5910549E-12 3.5803625E-12 A12 -1.2631545E-15 -1.5693499E-15 1.1077728E-13 9.5685182E-14 A14 3.5215525E-18 -3.2465504E-19 -1.2737224E-15 -9.2383417E-16 A16 2.8343171E-21 1.4163251E-20 3.8054437E-18 2.5026463E-18

[0509] [Example 7]

[0510] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 7 are shown in FIG. Fig.15 . The variable power optical system of Example 7 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, an intermediate group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes one lens group having positive refractive power. The intermediate group GM includes, from the object side to the image side, a first intermediate lens group GM1 having negative refractive power and a second intermediate lens group GM2 having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, and a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power.

[0511] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the 1st subsequent lens group GR1 and the 3rd subsequent lens group GR3 are fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes only one focusing group. The focusing group includes the 2nd subsequent lens group GR2. When focusing from an object at infinity to the closest object, the 2nd subsequent lens group GR2 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the 2nd intermediate lens group GM2.

[0512] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 7, basic lens data is shown in Table 19, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 20, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 21, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 23. Fig.16 .

[0513] [Table 19]

[0514] Example 7

[0515] Sn R D Nd vd θgF ρ 1 95.4955 1.5000 1.92286 20.88 0.63900 3.94 2 66.7408 6.5478 1.49782 82.57 0.53862 3.86 3 -406.6091 0.1000 4 90.8471 3.7213 1.51680 64.20 0.53430 2.52 5 514.2870 DD[5] 6 -283.7926 2.2257 1.92286 18.90 0.64960 7 -48.6857 0.6818 1.58313 59.37 0.54345 8 152.4999 DD[8] 9 -96.6295 0.6935 1.48749 70.24 0.53007 10 21.9319 1.9213 1.75500 52.32 0.54757 11 30.8958 3.0734 12 -37.4814 0.6750 1.80400 46.53 0.55775 13 341.6220 DD

[13] *14 96.5405 1.7872 1.55332 71.68 0.54029 *15 -113.8488 1.6142 16(Wed) ∞ 2.6248 *17 69.0958 3.5107 1.49710 81.56 0.53848 *18 -45.5162 1.4579 19 62.0205 1.1839 1.85025 30.05 0.59797 20 32.61.56 0.9998 21 35.7565 1.0437 1.85478 24.80 0.61232 22 21.2347 3.7923 1.43700 95.10 0.53364 23 219.4700 1.0001 24 35.9408 4.5193 1.71299 53.87 0.54587 25 -37.7743 DD

[25] 26 104.7504 1.4935 1.96300 24.11 0.62126 27 -507.6725 0.6814 1.62299 58.16 0.54589 28 16.0222 DD

[28] *29 -15.2273 1.7598 1.51633 64.06 0.53345 *30 -13.9010 26.9984

[0516] [Table 20]

[0517] Example 7

[0518] Goodbye Middle TV Zr 1.0 2.0 3.7 f 35.50 70.99 131.34 Bf 27.00 27.00 27.00 FNo. 2.92 2.91 2.91 2ω[°] 46.0 21.6 11.6 DD[5] 1.86 30.93 48.67 DD[8] 2.16 4.65 5.42 DD

[13] 24.96 12.74 1.00 DD

[25] 1.05 2.65 2.56 DD

[28] 21.60 19.99 20.08

[0519] [Table 21]

[0520] Example 7

[0521]

[0522] Sn 17 18 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -1.5947866E-05 -7.6602344E-06 A6 1.8775474E-07 8.4855623E-08 A8 -6.6213346E-10 -1.3674203E-10 A10 -3.7133566E-12 -2.5692135E-12 A12 2.3217689E-14 1.3565481E-14

[0523] [Example 8]

[0524] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 8 are shown in FIG. Figure 17 . The variable power optical system of Example 8 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes, from the object side to the image side, a first front lens group GF1 having positive refractive power and a second front lens group GF2 having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes a lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having negative refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power.

[0525] When zooming from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the 4th subsequent lens group GR4 is fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes only one focusing group. The focusing group includes the 2nd front lens group GF2. When focusing from an infinitely distant object to the closest object, the 2nd front lens group GF2 moves toward the object side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0526] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 8, basic lens data is shown in Table 22, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 23, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 24, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 25. Figure 18 .

[0527] [Table 22]

[0528] Example 8

[0529] Sn R D Yes etc. θgF ρ 1 2014.0158 1.2518 1.72047 34.71 0.58350 3.19 2 95.5642 7.8808 1.49700 81.61 0.53887 3.70 3 -120.8520 0.0878 *4 53.9661 6.9111 1.51633 64.06 0.53345 2.38 *5 185.3625 DD[5] 6 41.8754 5.1144 1.67790 55.35 0.54339 3.59 7 -70.2179 0.6003 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 3.59 8 -594.3315 DD[8] 9 -115.0442 0.5243 1.83481 42.74 0.56490 10 30.7331 2.3110 11 -73.7789 0.5066 1.77535 50.31 0.55042 12 22.4248 5.2554 1.89286 20.36 0.63944 13 -148.7079 DD

[13] 14(Wed) ∞ 3.1893 15 -21.8675 0.6237 1.89190 37.13 0.57813 16 65.2654 4.1534 1.55032 75.50 0.54001 17 -26.7239 0.0500 *18 81.0257 3.4506 1.76450 49.10 0.55289 *19 -38.6778 DD

[19] 20 62.4339 0.9426 1.90366 31.34 0.59636 21 27.7227 4.9585 1.59282 68.62 0.54414 22 -36.5796 DD

[22] 23 -256.3769 1.6804 1.89286 20.36 0.63944 24 -60.9168 1.6583 *25 -51.2784 0.7237 1.80835 40.55 0.56931 *26 56.3357 DD

[26] 27 -56.5322 1.6893 1.48749 70.32 0.52917 28 -122.9290 10.8900

[0530] [Table 23]

[0531] Example 8

[0532] Goodbye Middle TV Zr 1.0 1.7 2.7 f 50.21 87.01 135.10 Bf 10.89 10.89 10.89 FNo. 2.88 2.89 2.88 2ω[°] 32.2 18.0 11.6 DD[5] 3.66 35.34 54.31 DD[8] 2.12 1.51 0.47 DD

[13] 14.26 5.39 2.56 DD

[19] 5.93 2.66 1.93 DD

[22] 24.08 12.67 1.18 DD

[26] 2.33 13.88 29.51

[0533] [Table 24]

[0534] Example 8

[0535] Sn 4 5 18 19 KA 9.2111719E-01 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -4.2307177E-07 -4.8996533E-07 -1.4939507E-06 4.3103917E-06 A6 -1.3542761E-09 -1.8192791E-09 -2.9590794E-08 -1.8263042E-08 A8 4.9579771E-13 3.4217165E-12 1.2966623E-09 9.1674282E-10 A10 -1.3901503E-15 -9.3493540E-15 -2.0718971E-11 -1.3969530E-11 A12 -3.9536828E-18 -5.7988290E-18 5.6424888E-14 1.6047769E-14 A14 -1.0202182E-20 1.6218112E-20 4.1006909E-16 3.5255759E-16 A16 6.2926457E-24 1.0465632E-23 4.3816455E-18 4.5162287E-18 A18 3.8885899E-26 -4.2193166E-26 -6.9395240E-20 -5.7357582E-20 A20 -5.3417191E-29 1.2980363E-29 1.7652655E-22 1.2981241F-22

[0536] Sn 25 26 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 3.5442917E-05 3.6671621E-05 A6 -1.6545886E-07 -1.2359358E-07 A8 -1.9678137E-09 -3.4634281E-09 A10 -1.1503234E-11 2.5396605E-11 A12 3.8538100E-13 -1.5492673E-14 A14 2.7659304E-15 2.6202055E-15 A16 -3.0584127E-17 -4.8341907E-18 A18 -3.5965238E-19 -3.1955587E-19 A20 2.7923543E-21 1.4144200E-21

[0537] [Example 9]

[0538] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 9 are shown in FIG. Figure 19 . The variable power optical system of Example 9 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes, from the object side to the image side, a first front lens group GF1 having positive refractive power and a second front lens group GF2 having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes a lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power.

[0539] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the 2nd front lens group GF2, the 1st subsequent lens group GR1 and the 3rd subsequent lens group GR3 are fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes only one focusing group. The focusing group includes the 2nd subsequent lens group GR2. When focusing from an object at infinity to the closest object, the 2nd subsequent lens group GR2 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0540] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 9, basic lens data are shown in Table 25, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 26, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 27, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 28. Figure 20 .

[0541] [Table 25]

[0542] Example 9

[0543] Sn R D Yes etc. θgF ρ 1 78.1634 1.2086 1.95375 32.32 0.59015 5.10 2 59.5997 6.7839 1.43700 95.10 0.53364 3.53 3 -437.4503 DD[3] 4 40.8796 4.7108 1.49700 81.61 0.53887 3.70 5 157.9819 DD[5] *6 831.4671 0.6998 2.00330 28.27 0.59802 *7 37.5448 3.3306 8 -72.4074 0.6758 1.49700 81.54 0.53748 9 42.4461 2.9250 1.92286 18.90 0.64960 10 2823.7559 DD

[10] *11 81.6046 2.3103 1.76450 49.10 0.55289 *12 -84.0371 0.2780 13 -48.1357 0.5925 1.84666 23.78 0.62054 14 76.2075 0.1365 15 46.2037 2.2728 1.83481 42.74 0.56490 16 898.0126 DD

[16] 17(Wed) ∞ 1.8184 18 -566.4844 2.3157 1.88300 39.22 0.57288 19 -41.8399 0.0517 20 58.8444 2.5450 1.59282 68.62 0.54414 21 -86.4576 0.5000 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 22 -658.4801 DD

[22] 23 61.3052 1.6211 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 24 941.2007 0.5130 1.72000 50.23 0.55214 *25 16.1643 DD

[25] *26 42.1687 4.9534 1.59201 67.02 0.53589 *27 -25.6861 DD

[27] *28 -30.3599 0.5412 1.83220 40.10 0.57151 29 68.2344 DD

[29]

[0544] [Table 26]

[0545] Example 9

[0546] Goodbye Middle TV Zr 1.0 1.7 3.0 f 46.21 80.10 136.33 Bf 11.00 13.57 19.13 FNo. 2.88 2.87 2.87 2ω[°] 34.6 20.0 11.8 DD[3] 0.13 19.22 37.99 DD[5] 1.72 16.06 26.37 DD

[10] 25.78 11.43 1.14 DD

[16] 1.13 1.13 1.13 DD

[22] 8.66 5.27 1.16 DD

[25] 12.22 15.61 19.72 DD

[27] 9.30 6.73 1.16 DD

[29] 11.00 13.57 19.13

[0547] [Table 27]

[0548] Example 9

[0549] Sn 6 7 11 12 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -6.1941629E-06 -6.2392940E-06 -2.0870517E-05 -1.0396099E-05 A6 7.1809566E-08 6.1573283E-08 -1.5566667E-08 -5.0446544E-08 A8 -1.9528599E-10 2.0976691E-10 -5.8450323E-09 -4.2889959E-09 A10 -8.9429316E-13 -6.7776353E-12 9.8173464E-11 5.9125676E-11 A12 -2.1438968E-14 2.1834325E-14 -7.0097432E-13 1.5077417E-13 A14 4.2156552E-16 2.7184262E-16 1.7941271E-15 -1.1834038E-14 A16 -2.6089719E-18 -2.4792488E-18 -4.8953767E-17 9.1939637E-17 A18 7.0946997E-21 7.4732223E-21 7.1881664E-19 -9.6054487E-20 A20 -7.2178274E-24 -7.7115271E-24 -2.9085516E-21 -9.0505428E-22

[0550] Sn 25 26 27 28 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 1.6203794E-06 -5.3720309E-07 6.4869417E-06 1.7568276E-05 A6 -9.1406039E-08 -1.5269005E-07 -8.0489487E-08 -1.8423970E-07 A8 3.3348603E-09 5.4018226E-09 -4.9206847E-10 5.2507093E-09 A10 -3.0408977E-11 -1.8098751E-10 4.1243541E-12 -9.9209545E-11 A12 -3.4106884E-12 2.9888709E-12 2.5263892E-13 1.2714889E-12 A14 1.6619848E-13 -2.0523690E-14 -8.9670257E-15 -1.4993158E-14 A16 -3.4309662E-15 -9.2449546E-17 8.4365062E-17 1.6014559E-16 A18 3.4516349E-17 2.1292970E-18 -2.1106381E-19 -1.0655483E-18 A20 -1.3750002E-19 -8.9487706E-21 -6.9297266E-22 2.9319311E-21

[0551] [Example 10]

[0552] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 10 are shown in FIG. Figure 21 . The variable power optical system of Example 10 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, an intermediate group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes one lens group having positive refractive power. The intermediate group GM includes, from the object side to the image side, a first intermediate lens group GM1 having negative refractive power and a second intermediate lens group GM2 having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power.

[0553] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, all lens groups change the intervals with adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes two focusing groups. The focusing group on the object side includes the second subsequent lens group GR2, and the focusing group on the image side includes the third subsequent lens group GR3. When focusing from an infinitely distant object to the closest object, the second subsequent lens group GR2 and the third subsequent lens group GR3 change their mutual intervals and move toward the object side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the first intermediate lens group GM1.

[0554] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 10, basic lens data are shown in Table 28, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 29, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 30, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 31. Figure 22 .

[0555] [Table 28]

[0556] Example 10

[0557] Sn R D Yes etc. θgF ρ 1 142.7075 1.5000 1.80518 25.42 0.61616 3.37 2 72.2315 5.2702 1.48749 70.32 0.52917 2.45 3 -14260.7229 0.0491 4 67.5388 5.5102 1.51680 64.20 0.53430 2.52 5 -1426.3732 DD[5] 6 531.0753 0.6591 1.71736 29.52 0.60483 7 41.0076 0.4304 8 53.0601 2.2738 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 9 241.1541 2.5723 *10 -34.2659 0.8000 1.49710 81.56 0.53848 *11 61.4776 DD

[11] 12(Wed) ∞ 1.6544 *13 -49.8643 1.2834 1.80610 40.73 0.56940 *14 223.3457 0.0480 15 73.2174 2.8419 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 16 246.9599 DD

[16] 17 56.6683 1.0100 1.57099 50.80 0.55887 18 20.0692 8.2028 1.49700 81.54 0.53748 19 -30.7316 DD

[19] 20 -21.4459 0.5272 1.85478 24.80 0.61232 21 -39.0881 0.0485 22 34.2598 4.5644 1.43875 94.66 0.53402 23 -62.0134 DD

[23] *24 81.7272 5.5187 1.51633 64.06 0.53345 *25 -28.8989 DD

[25] 26 -97.4174 2.6197 2.00069 25.43 0.61417 27 -46.1348 0.9281 *28 -155.9970 1.2498 1.58313 59.38 0.54237 *29 23.0862 3.9272 *30 -44.1705 1.3748 1.58913 61.15 0.53824 *31 -94.1655 DD

[31]

[0558] [Table 29]

[0559] Example 10

[0560] Goodbye Middle TV Zr 1.0 2.1 3.8 f 35.69 74.95 134.55 Bf 14.65 21.97 36.59 FNo. 2.93 2.92 2.93 2ω[°] 46.0 20.6 11.4 DD[5] 0.30 36.75 49.97 DD

[11] 14.45 3.18 2.30 DD

[16] 6.11 6.14 1.10 DD

[19] 12.12 13.66 18.01 DD

[23] 6.51 2.92 3.30 DD

[25] 14.26 8.74 1.71 DD

[31] 14.65 21.97 36.59

[0561] [Table 30]

[0562] Example 10

[0563] Sn 10 11 13 14 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 3.9289950E-05 3.1382281E-05 -3.6715084E-05 -3.1417356E-05 A6 -6.2222295E-07 -6.9654970E-07 2.3131046E-07 3.2770274E-07 A8 7.7485445E-09 9.4262320E-09 1.1006884E-09 -1.2468833E-09 A10 -6.4359522E-11 -8.4194127E-11 -2.7014517E-11 2.6005545E-13 A12 3.8811798E-13 5.3915794E-13 1.4539233E-13 -3.2548240E-14 A14 -1.5973014E-15 -2.2487350E-15 -4.2782930E-16 3.1679074E-16 A16 3.1363498E-18 4.1880391E-18 1.2563210E-18 -5.0839274E-19

[0564] Sn 24 25 28 29 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -1.6486615E-05 7.8506877E-06 -1.5719287E-05 -1.0611362E-05 A6 1.9559879E-08 1.8205966E-08 1.2936027E-08 -1.1544615E-08 A8 -4.4954513E-10 -4.0656374E-10 -1.7313330E-10 -4.4072905E-10 A10 3.8243491E-12 3.4161123E-12 1.9097988E-12 -7.5715737E-13 A12 -1.4884728E-14 -8.8640746E-15 -8.7846804E-15 4.2707385E-14 A14 6.7049084E-18 -3.2691520E-17 -7.6695115E-17 -6.3924994E-16 A16 1.4841271E-19 2.3302423E-19 1.4277240E-19 1.3766424E-18

[0565] Sn 30 31 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -1.5730382E-05 -9.1034702E-06 A6 -1.7728701E-08 2.4131899E-08 A8 4.8161744E-10 2.8566976E-10 A10 -7.2130763E-12 1.8638775E-13 A12 1.1182054E-13 4.8934190E-14 A14 -1.8668958E-16 -1.6838289E-16 A16 4.5673236E-19 1.4262558E-18

[0566] [Example 11]

[0567] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 11 are shown in FIG. Figure 23 . The variable power optical system of Example 11 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes one lens group having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes one lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having negative refractive power, a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having positive refractive power, and a fifth subsequent lens group GR5 having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes the above-mentioned Lp1 lens and Ln1 lens.

[0568] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the second subsequent lens group GR2 and the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 are fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes only one focusing group. The focusing group includes the third subsequent lens group GR3. When focusing from an infinitely distant object to the closest object, the third subsequent lens group GR3 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0569] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 11, basic lens data is shown in Table 31, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 32, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 33, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 34. Figure 24 The effective diameter of each surface of the Lp1 lens and the Ln1 lens is shown in the FD column of the basic lens data table.

[0570] [Table 31]

[0571] Embodiment 11

[0572] Sn R D Yes etc. θgF ρ ED 1 77.5521 2.0000 2.00069 25.46 0.61364 4.73 2 59.8054 7.4989 1.43700 95.10 0.53364 3.53 3 -868.7244 0.1905 4 67.1585 4.2522 1.55032 75.50 0.54001 4.09 5 223.0770 DD[5] *6 27.7165 1.8354 1.48749 70.24 0.53007 *7 21.5104 10.8890 8 -19.2347 0.9828 1.77535 50.31 0.55042 9 81.3320 2.2668 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 10 -202.9038 DD

[10] 11(Wed) ∞ 0.7667 *12 31.5964 7.6635 1.49710 81.56 0.53848 *13 -31.1110 1.2517 14 -25.8653 1.0464 1.71736 29.52 0.60483 15 150.9778 0.8638 16 74.4502 3.6825 1.49700 81.61 0.53887 17 -42.4474 DD

[17] 18 460.3245 3.8136 1.71736 29.52 0.60483 19 -26.9803 0.0500 20 119.6800 5.1868 1.57099 50.80 0.55887 21 -20.0788 0.6411 1.92286 18.90 0.64960 22 -38.6929 DD

[22] 23 50.2629 2.4092 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 24 -205.5477 0.6692 1.88300 39.22 0.57288 25 16.0875 DD

[25] *26 58.0321 3.8716 1.49710 81.56 0.53848 22.000 *27 -48.5964 DD

[27] 21.468 *28 -11.3315 0.6494 1.85400 40.38 0.56890 21.296 *29 -21.3474 DD

[29] 22.819

[0573] [Table 32]

[0574] Embodiment 11

[0575] Goodbye Middle TV Zr 1.0 1.8 3.0 f 45.51 79.98 136.09 Bf 11.01 11.82 12.58 FNo. 2.90 2.91 2.90 2ω[°] 35.6 20.2 12.0 DD[5] 1.40 26.61 46.37 DD

[10] 11.73 3.99 0.30 DD

[17] 1.78 1.00 0.29 DD

[22] 4.69 4.55 0.17 DD

[25] 9.48 9.61 14.00 DD

[27] 7.62 6.80 6.04 DD

[29] 11.01 11.82 12.58

[0576] [Table 33]

[0577] Embodiment 11

[0578] Sn 6 7 12 13 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -3.2877188E-06 -2.0608309E-05 -3.9525444E-06 4.6432360E-05 A6 1.8182753E-07 3.0991317E-07 -6.7231184E-08 7.6178826E-09 A8 -1.2243380E-09 -5.5733828E-09 5.8820055E-09 5.7145938E-10 A10 2.3905985E-11 7.5466705E-11 -1.5186672E-10 2.2053326E-11 A12 -3.2572035E-13 -3.4033354E-13 1.8725650E-12 -5.4841139E-13 A14 3.4108553E-15 -1.5918245E-15 -1.0538184E-14 -7.6933989E-16 A16 -2.2193684E-17 1.7511910E-17 9.2985138E-18 1.2776851E-16 A18 7.9824750E-20 6.8167748E-22 8.1650253E-20 -1.3718102E-18 A20 -1.1435494E-22 -2.1871338E-22 8.6482545E-23 4.6943000E-21

[0579] Sn 26 27 28 29 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 3.2852987E-05 1.1642736E-05 4.9829467E-05 -4.3866419E-05 A6 1.0193523E-07 -6.2115231E-09 2.0405955E-06 1.8233863E-06 A8 -2.1867674E-09 5.3053333E-09 -2.4720135E-09 -1.4467466E-08 A10 6.0252094E-11 -7.3764905E-11 -1.5587437E-10 -3.8722271E-12 A12 -6.0197791E-13 -9.0242040E-14 1.0438246E-12 6.3168805E-13 A14 2.5223425E-15 1.5082944E-14 2.8701869E-15 1.5964043E-15 A16 1.0182084E-17 -1.3004696E-16 1.8882739E-16 -5.7816536E-17 A18 -1.1876260E-19 1.3724260E-19 -3.2373528E-18 2.5207282E-19 A20 6.1021612E-22 2.0473044E-21 1.3462582E-20 -2.9110345E-22

[0580] [Example 12]

[0581] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 12 are shown in FIG. Figure 25 . The variable power optical system of Example 12 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes one lens group having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes one lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having negative refractive power, a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having positive refractive power, and a fifth subsequent lens group GR5 having negative refractive power.

[0582] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, all lens groups change the intervals with adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes two focusing groups. The focus group on the object side includes the third subsequent lens group GR3, and the focus group on the image side includes the fourth subsequent lens group GR4. When focusing from an infinitely distant object to the closest object, the third subsequent lens group GR3 and the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 change the intervals between each other and move toward the object side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0583] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 12, basic lens data is shown in Table 34, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 35, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 36, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 37. Figure 26 .

[0584] [Table 34]

[0585] Example 12

[0586] Sn R D Yes etc. θgF ρ 1 117.3622 1.5000 1.80518 25.42 0.61616 3.37 2 65.6842 5.2702 1.48749 70.32 0.52917 2.45 3 548.0815 0.0493 4 64.1342 5.6153 1.51680 64.20 0.53430 2.52 5 -4942.5073 DD[5] 6 -35000.3430 0.5966 1.71736 29.52 0.60483 7 40.0960 0.4274 8 53.9629 2.8914 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 9 150.7221 2.1387 *10 -31.2754 0.8000 1.49710 81.56 0.53848 *11 59.5564 DD

[111] 12(Wed) ∞ 0.9923 *13 -118.6312 0.9643 1.80610 40.73 0.56940 *14 494.1120 1.0867 15 67.2935 1.7744 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 16 236.0749 DD

[16] 17 65.5480 1.0100 1.57099 50.80 0.55887 18 23.7682 6.8847 1.49700 81.54 0.53748 19 -34.1641 DD

[19] 20 -22.3379 1.1486 1.85478 24.80 0.61232 21 -59.9834 0.0486 22 34.8513 4.4256 1.43875 94.66 0.53402 23 -58.5986 DD

[23] *24 71.8953 5.2176 1.51633 64.06 0.53345 *25 -28.2276 DD

[25] 26 -101.1122 1.8800 2.00069 25.43 0.61417 27 -46.8376 1.4595 *28 -187.7066 1.2498 1.58313 59.38 0.54237 *29 23.6034 3.9527 *30 -44.3260 1.3749 1.58913 61.15 0.53824 *31 -101.9111 DD

[31]

[0587] [Table 35]

[0588] Example 12

[0589] Goodbye Middle TV Zr 1.0 2.1 3.8 f 35.85 75.28 135.14 Bf 14.50 21.05 33.34 FNo. 2.92 2.92 2.92 2ω[°] 45.6 20.6 11.4 DD[5] 1.70 34.59 51.07 DD

[11] 11.76 4.37 2.30 DD

[16] 9.97 5.15 1.77 DD

[19] 10.72 12.87 14.22 DD

[23] 5.98 3.86 7.50 DD

[25] 13.78 9.71 0.80 DD

[31] 14.50 21.05 33.34

[0590] [Table 36]

[0591] Example 12

[0592] Sn 10 11 13 14 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 4.6912027E-05 3.6696804E-05 -4.2458540E-05 -3.7621521E-05 A6 -7.0169529E-07 -6.7184855E-07 2.2152151E-07 2.5974703E-07 A8 8.8605965E-09 9.2355734E-09 6.1675508E-10 -6.0570731E-10 A10 -6.8829783E-11 -9.2301282E-11 -1.9508109E-11 4.8253700E-13 A12 2.6621903E-13 6.4057363E-13 1.5913114E-13 -2.4434819E-14 A14 -2.7940617E-16 -2.8139915E-15 -4.1724978E-16 3.8110289E-16 A16 -3.0874434E-19 5.9518752E-18 -5.6227732E-19 -1.6280529E-18

[0593] Sn 24 25 28 29 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -1.6024640E-05 8.7677820E-06 -2.1427371E-05 -4.9151360E-06 A6 1.5982304E-08 1.4001137E-08 8.8174829E-09 8.1406843E-09 A8 -4.7712019E-10 -4.2214433E-10 -1.3457216E-10 -4.2250951E-10 A10 3.7663482E-12 3.2983491E-12 1.6155946E-12 6.2882486E-14 A12 -1.4889593E-14 -8.7172373E-15 -9.3184320E-15 5.2252083E-14 A14 3.3566874E-18 -3.2666725E-17 -6.3209109E-17 -6.0832494E-16 A16 1.5334625E-19 2.2056773E-19 2.0072035E-19 5.1426096E-19

[0594] Sn 30 31 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -1.4427333E-05 -1.9115898E-05 A6 -2.4418533E-08 8.9357651E-09 A8 4.6604609E-10 1.6212053E-10 A10 -7.6470221E-12 -1.1228120E-12 A12 1.0294039E-13 4.2581204E-14 A14 -1.6779961E-16 -1.9571902E-16 A16 -4.0113490E-19 1.3410147E-18

[0595] [Example 13]

[0596] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 13 are shown in FIG. Figure 27. The variable power optical system of Example 13 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes one lens group having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes one lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power, and a fifth subsequent lens group GR5 having positive refractive power.

[0597] When zooming from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the middle group GM is fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes two focusing groups. The focusing group on the object side includes the second subsequent lens group GR2, and the focusing group on the image side includes the fourth subsequent lens group GR4. When focusing from an object at infinity to the closest object, the second subsequent lens group GR2 moves toward the object side, the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0598] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 13, basic lens data are shown in Table 37, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 38, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 39, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 30. Figure 28 .

[0599] [Table 37]

[0600] Example 13

[0601] Sn R D Yes etc. θgF ρ 1 72.4142 5.0959 1.51680 64.20 0.53430 2.52 2 320.4037 0.1000 3 67.7988 1.3088 1.83400 37.18 0.57780 4.28 4 39.9692 9.3626 1.49700 81.54 0.53748 3.62 5 968.1377 DD[5] 6 566.4928 0.6000 1.75500 52.32 0.54757 7 26.8701 3.1832 8 -35.5930 1.0839 1.80400 46.53 0.55775 9 34.7881 2.6865 1.92119 23.96 0.62025 10 -548.8014 DD

[10] 11(Wed) ∞ 0.0478 *12 83.5272 3.4261 1.49710 81.56 0.53848 *13 -36.0487 DD

[13] 14 -16.1745 1.0374 1.53775 74.70 0.53936 15 152.3641 2.2255 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 16 -78.4138 DD

[16] 17 76.2422 0.9769 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 18 34.5132 5.9740 1.55200 70.70 0.54219 19 -32.6285 1.8388 20 -20.1934 0.6643 1.96300 24.11 0.62126 21 -28.7922 0.9998 22 72.2790 6.2882 1.48749 70.24 0.53007 23 -28.6034 0.9998 *24 40.3973 4.4561 1.49710 81.56 0.53848 *25 -134.4035 DD

[25] *26 35.3119 1.0562 1.61881 63.85 0.54182 *27 17.5308 DD

[27] *28 -170.4220 4.5863 1.58313 59.38 0.54237 *29 -25.9011 1.0001 30 -17.2334 1.1412 1.48749 70.24 0.53007 31 -52.7414 DD

[31]

[0602] [Table 38]

[0603] Example 13

[0604] Goodbye Middle TV Zr 1.0 2.3 4.6 f 29.36 67.54 133.60 Bf 17.18 32.12 38.51 FNo. 2.91 2.91 2.91 2ω[°] 56.6 23.6 12.0 DD[5] 1.19 35.25 56.05 DD

[10] 13.13 5.50 0.97 DD

[13] 4.14 4.31 5.77 DD

[16] 6.33 3.74 0.85 DD

[25] 8.82 6.08 1.62 DD

[27] 14.34 12.19 16.22 DD

[31] 17.18 32.12 38.51

[0605] [Table 39]

[0606] Example 13

[0607] Sn 12 KA 0.0000000E+00 A3 0.0000000E+00 A4 -1.4868534E-05 A5 1.5378107E-06 A6 -1.6270224E-08 A7 -2.4989778E-08 A8 -7.6657570E-09 A9 1.2062201E-09 A10 7.0582853E-11 A11 -1.2612736E-11 A12 -1.1806454E-13 A13 1.2360206E-15 A14 8.0023796E-17 A15 7.6197944E-16 A16 -2.2440695E-17 A17 -5.9466099E-18 A18 7.9079387E-20 A19 4.4185946E-20 A20 -2.0965218E-21

[0608] Sn 13 24 25 26 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -2.0592897E-05 -5.3228578E-06 6.7114504E-06 -1.7346348E-05 A6 -9.3354978E-08 -3.4492212E-09 -1.6058889E-08 9.0699772E-08 A8 -1.5487163E-09 -2.3158171E-10 2.5675586E-11 -1.9057930E-10 A10 2.7737017E-11 2.1125286E-12 2.8405095E-13 -4.3673360E-12 A12 -2.0255493E-13 -1.1004447E-14 -6.6972267E-15 2.4165180E-14

[0609] Sn 27 28 29 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -2.2480936E-05 -1.1390405E-05 -2.9842643E-05 A6 7.4887375E-08 -4.9935111E-08 -7.9230767E-08 A8 -1.8954224E-10 3.5902654E-10 6.6709210E-11 A10 -8.0300096E-12 -3.5487477E-13 1.2023258E-12 A12 4.4847230E-14 -1.6235019E-14 -2.0432561E-14

[0610] [Example 14]

[0611] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 14 are shown in FIG. Figure 29. The variable power optical system of Example 14 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes one lens group having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes one lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power, and a fifth subsequent lens group GR5 having negative refractive power.

[0612] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the 1st subsequent lens group GR1 and the 3rd subsequent lens group GR3 are fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes two focusing groups. The focusing group on the object side includes the 2nd subsequent lens group GR2, and the focusing group on the image side includes the 4th subsequent lens group GR4. When focusing from an object at infinity to the closest object, the 2nd subsequent lens group GR2 moves toward the object side, the 4th subsequent lens group GR4 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0613] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 14, basic lens data is shown in Table 40, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 41, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 42, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 43. Figure 30 .

[0614] [Table 40]

[0615] Embodiment 14

[0616] Sn R D Yes etc. θgF ρ 1 62.5508 4.5393 1.48749 70.24 0.53007 2.46 2 391.7698 0.0805 3 66.1629 1.0505 1.61340 44.27 0.56340 2.93 4 32.4954 10.2066 1.43700 95.10 0.53364 3.53 5 752.4278 DD[5] *6 -289.0110 0.6033 1.76450 49.10 0.55289 *7 42.0001 3.0664 8 -41.1513 0.5098 1.62280 57.05 0.54640 9 67.5048 2.4998 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 10 329.0009 DD

[10] 11(Wed) ∞ 0.3662 *12 37.3980 4.2624 1.49710 81.56 0.53848 *13 -55.7662 DD

[13] 14 -18.2795 1.0102 1.49700 81.54 0.53748 15 42.1509 3.2502 1.85150 40.78 0.56958 16 -841.1824 DD

[16] 17 1043.7510 2.4998 1.48749 70.24 0.53007 18 -32.8361 0.1748 19 331.1319 0.6248 1.95375 32.32 0.59056 20 25.8165 3.9432 1.49700 81.61 0.53887 21 -42.0119 0.1000 22 30.7486 2.7978 1.48749 70.24 0.53007 23 -287.9050 0.0445 24 28.3848 3.4795 1.52841 76.45 0.53954 25 246.6570 DD

[25] *26 57.4136 0.6297 1.58913 61.15 0.53824 *27 15.0857 DD

[27] 28 -98.1949 1.6642 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 29 -53.1338 2.7836 *30 209.9203 0.9735 1.61881 63.85 0.54182 *31 41.2080 DD

[31]

[0617] [Table 41]

[0618] Embodiment 14

[0619] Goodbye Middle TV Zr 1.0 1.7 3.1 f 44.52 77.16 136.23 Bf 10.99 17.26 19.01 FNo. 2.88 2.88 2.88 2ω[°] 36.8 21.0 12.0 DD[5] 2.31 28.91 45.70 DD

[10] 10.20 5.39 0.59 DD

[13] 7.57 8.41 12.96 DD

[16] 5.63 4.79 0.25 DD

[25] 7.57 6.01 1.77 DD

[27] 18.48 13.78 16.27 DD

[31] 10.99 17.26 19.01

[0620] [Table 42]

[0621] Embodiment 14

[0622] Sn 6 7 26 27 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 2.1010980E-05 2.0365034E-05 2.5486234E-05 2.3032737E-05 A6 -2.1824535E-07 -3.1359622E-07 1.5205023E-07 1.2407713E-07 A8 3.9670978E-09 8.6467178E-09 -1.6424320E-08 -1.5897006E-08 A10 -4.6370071E-11 -1.4303806E-10 3.0996806E-10 2.9876676E-10 A12 1.2472451E-13 1.0813385E-12 -1.7583477E-12 -1.4718029E-12 A14 2.1934902E-15 -6.9777393E-16 -4.9333109E-15 -1.1538990E-14 A16 -1.5186148E-17 -3.7265751E-17 -5.8895075E-17 1.7010441E-16 A18 -1.3810106E-20 1.7027002E-19 2.1159559E-18 -2.1271975E-18 A20 2.2430800E-22 -1.2806315E-22 -9.8089938E-21 1.6539767E-20

[0623] Sn 12 13 30 31 KA 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 -1.5302500E+00 0.0000000E+00 A3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 A4 -8.3760244E-07 4.9170705E-06 -6.0834676E-04 -6.4494308E-04 A5 1.8920491E-06 9.9493033E-07 5.0044317E-05 5.4110568E-05 A6 2.7248528E-07 3.3010242E-08 -2.2344594E-07 1.4666478E-07 A7 -1.0043292E-07 -2.0252576E-10 -1.5164509E-07 -2.2559384E-07 A8 9.0733896E-09 -3.0437952E-09 7.8892754E-09 4.1454695E-09 A9 3.1605671E-10 8.2278101E-10 -3.8935769E-10 2.8393718E-10 A10 -1.7116266E-11 -7.6410609E-11 -2.0677785E-11 1.2556398E-12 A11 -1.0750874E-11 2.7568471E-12 -6.4821042E-13 3.0849353E-13 A12 8.1906117E-13 6.3225123E-13 3.8629669E-13 -5.3264361E-14 A13 6.3111431E-14 -8.7422177E-14 -3.3007955E-14 1.6624157E-15 A14 -6.1184530E-15 -2.6415825E-15 7.0558952E-15 -9.5747039E-16 A15 -5.8701344E-16 7.3737491E-16 -5.0414203E-16 1.2870944E-16 A16 4.7469469E-17 -2.9157781E-17 1.9424853E-17 3.0764469E-18 A17 3.7998425E-18 3.8861938E-18 -9.3963629E-19 -4.7990253E-19 A18 1.7291422E-19 3.8024530E-19 2.0206781E-20 -6.9319332E-20 A19 -8.1377344E-20 -1.2734478E-19 -3.0333849E-20 6.4353282E-22 A20 3.7409388E-21 6.3495850E-21 2.2097747E-21 2.8517480E-22

[0624] [Example 15]

[0625] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 15 are shown in FIG. Figure 31. The variable power optical system of Example 15 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, an intermediate group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes one lens group having positive refractive power. The intermediate group GM includes, from the object side to the image side, a first intermediate lens group GM1 having negative refractive power and a second intermediate lens group GM2 having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power.

[0626] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, all lens groups change the intervals with adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes two focusing groups. The focusing group on the object side includes the second subsequent lens group GR2, and the focusing group on the image side includes the third subsequent lens group GR3. When focusing from an infinitely distant object to the closest object, the second subsequent lens group GR2 and the third subsequent lens group GR3 change their mutual intervals and move toward the object side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the first intermediate lens group GM1.

[0627] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 15, basic lens data are shown in Table 43, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 44, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 45, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 46. Figure 32 .

[0628] [Table 43]

[0629] Embodiment 15

[0630] Sn R D Yes etc. θgF ρ 1 131.7942 1.5000 1.80518 25.42 0.61616 3.37 2 69.8925 5.2702 1.48749 70.32 0.52917 2.45 3 840.3981 0.0495 4 62.9650 5.5586 1.51680 64.20 0.53430 2.52 5 2983.2864 DD[5] 6 407.6438 0.6829 1.71736 29.52 0.60483 7 40.0623 0.4933 8 52.4241 2.9547 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 9 220.7333 1.9875 *10 -37.3981 0.8000 1.49710 81.56 0.53848 *11 59.0616 DD

[11] 12(Wed) ∞ 1.5751 *13 -51.5664 2.2209 1.80610 40.73 0.56940 *14 148.7836 0.0477 15 70.8063 1.9557 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 16 214.3479 DD

[16] 17 58.6756 1.0100 1.57099 50.80 0.55887 1.8 25.7474 6.8451 1.49700 81.54 0.53748 19 -29.8045 DD

[19] 20 -21.6794 0.5219 1.85478 24.80 0.61232 21 -44.8419 0.0470 22 35.5769 4.2117 1.43875 94.66 0.53402 23 -71.8467 DD

[23] *24 64.5425 5.4421 1.51633 64.06 0.53345 *25 -28.3781 DD

[25] 26 -100.3150 1.8306 2.00069 25.43 0.61417 27 -47.0483 1.4316 *28 -176.4185 1.2501 1.58313 59.38 0.54237 *29 23.4774 3.9564 *30 -45.3341 1.3748 1.58913 61.15 0.53824 *31 -112.5444 DD

[31]

[0631] [Table 44]

[0632] Embodiment 15

[0633] Goodbye Middle TV Zr 1.0 2.1 3.8 f 35.85 75.28 135.15 Bf 14.58 21.52 30.53 FNo. 2.92 2.92 2.92 2ω[°] 46.2 21.0 11.4 DD[5] 0.30 34.50 53.29 DD

[11] 16.11 3.30 2.30 DD

[16] 5.87 4.30 1.10 DD

[19] 11.91 15.21 18.37 DD

[23] 5.51 2.34 5.46 DD

[25] 15.87 11.30 3.62 DD

[31] 14.58 21.52 30.53

[0634] [Table 45]

[0635] Embodiment 15

[0636] Sn 10 11 13 14 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.00000000+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 4.6363031E-05 3.8187923E-05 -4.4185013E-05 -3.5130922E-05 A6 -7.2426129E-07 -7.1333242E-07 2.1890332E-07 2.6307592E-07 A8 8.7603321E-09 9.3562852E-09 5.5443949E-10 -6.8769494E-10 A10 -6.5699576E-11 -9.1931099E-11 -2.0172068E-11 -1.3232448E-13 A12 2.4814312E-13 6.4453508E-13 1.5610467E-13 -2.7116432E-14 A14 -1.8062925E-16 -2.8190461E-15 -4.0853005E-16 3.8450106E-16 A16 -9.2720979E-19 5.6694109E-18 -2.2585894E-19 -1.3224119E-18

[0637] Sn 24 25 28 29 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -1.6405555E-05 8.6357854E-06 -2.1295440E-05 -5.4210233E-06 A6 1.7492705E-08 1.3457499E-08 8.6590697E-09 8.9742628E-09 A8 -4.7495680E-10 -4.2082182E-10 -1.3186159E-10 -4.2210463E-10 A10 3.7703145E-12 3.2997531E-12 1.6106738E-12 -6.4485595E-14 A12 -1.4974919E-14 -8.7629927E-15 -9.8855418E-15 5.1415993E-14 A14 2.7111451E-18 -3.3536337E-17 -6.7485555E-17 -5.9796080E-16 A16 1.5164340E-19 2.1734757E-19 1.5748930E-19 5.4160734E-19

[0638] Sn 30 31 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -1.4195963E-05 -2.0346967E-05 A6 -2.0103098E-08 5.6534017E-09 A8 4.5732269E-10 1.5937426E-10 A10 -7.6550115E-12 -1.1127867E-12 A12 1.0280928E-13 4.1725612E-14 A14 -1.6394885E-16 -1.9652310E-16 A16 -3.4044592E-19 1.2594197E-18

[0639] [Example 16]

[0640] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 16 are shown in FIG. Figure 33. The variable power optical system of Example 16 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes, from the object side to the image side, a first front lens group GF1 having positive refractive power and a second front lens group GF2 having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes a lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having negative refractive power, a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having positive refractive power, and a fifth subsequent lens group GR5 having negative refractive power.

[0641] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the second subsequent lens group GR2 and the fourth subsequent lens group GR4 are fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes only one focusing group. The focusing group includes the third subsequent lens group GR3. When focusing from an infinitely distant object to the closest object, the third subsequent lens group GR3 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0642] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 16, basic lens data are shown in Table 46, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 47, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 48, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 49. Figure 34 .

[0643] [Table 46]

[0644] Example 16

[0645] Sn R D Yes etc. θgF ρ 1 58.2421 1.3589 1.95375 32.32 0.59015 5.10 2 46.0991 12.1059 1.43700 95.10 0.53364 3.53 3 -670.4470 DD[3] 4 45.4115 4.8177 1.51680 64.20 0.53430 2.52 5 238.0286 DD[5] *6 544.7036 0.5000 1.85400 40.38 0.56890 *7 38.9226 2.9654 8 -51.4207 1.1069 1.62041 60.29 0.54266 9 38.9561 2.0569 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 10 109.5603 DD

[10] *11 60.5786 2.6168 1.74320 49.29 0.55303 *12 -54.2287 0.2100 13 -38.5592 0.4999 1.80518 25.46 0.61572 14 42.9798 0.1826 15 35.7332 2.1768 1.79952 42.22 0.56727 16 179.1535 DD

[16] 17(Wed) ∞ 0.6647 18 26235.4794 4.8222 1.88300 39.22 0.57288 19 -34.2432 0.0582 20 34.0085 3.3906 1.59282 68.62 0.54414 21 -51.2023 0.5720 1.85478 24.80 0.61232 22 1148.5202 DD

[22] 23 80.5510 1.8113 1.89286 20.36 0.63944 24 -88.4076 0.5710 1.77535 50.31 0.55042 *25 16.1279 DD

[25] *26 49.9889 4.8808 1.59201 67.02 0.53589 *27 -28.7995 DD

[27] *28 -34.8500 0.5000 1.80625 40.91 0.56920 29 198.4421 DD

[29]

[0646] [Table 47]

[0647] Example 16

[0648] Goodbye Middle TV Zr 1.0 1.7 2.9 f 45.07 78.11 131.82 Bf 11.11 14.87 20.53 FNo. 2.89 2.89 2.87 2ω[°] 34.8 19.8 11.8 DD[3] 0.19 30.47 39.74 DD[5] 2.36 9.77 19.49 DD

[10] 16.21 11.08 2.97 DD

[16] 1.73 1.59 2.47 DD

[22] 7.90 6.21 2.29 DD

[25] 8.61 10.29 14.21 DD

[27] 10.83 7.07 1.41 DD

[29] 11.11 14.87 20.53

[0649] [Table 48]

[0650] Example 16

[0651] Sn 6 7 11 12 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -7.7105810E-06 -1.0080696E-05 -2.6737398E-05 -1.3177043E-05 A6 7.1182377E-08 1.0110463E-07 -1.9503372E-08 -3.6461471E-09 A8 1.1046704E-09 -1.5653472E-10 1.0764886E-09 4.2575252E-10 A10 -3.9704959E-11 -1.7423498E-11 -4.4330148E-11 -8.8761172E-12 A12 1.4160432E-13 2.0636031E-13 4.5405701E-13 -2.6295513E-13 A14 3.7935480E-15 -2.4705718E-15 -1.0825245E-15 5.9045110E-15 A16 -1.7823483E-17 4.0335066E-17 -3.3860551E-17 -5.3550423E-17 A18 -2.5840683E-19 -3.5782117E-19 3.7193362E-19 1.8586891E-19 A20 1.5564831E-21 1.0010285E-21 -2.4725591E-21 -1.0682891E-21

[0652] Sn 25 26 27 28 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 5.4160400E-06 2.8752525E-05 2.6492695E-05 2.0191383E-06 A6 2.1037012E-07 4.0230048E-07 -9.7495814E-08 -1.9813107E-07 A8 -9.0175276E-09 -8.2416896E-09 5.8990723E-09 1.8934932E-09 A10 -3.8266089E-10 1.0780792E-10 -1.0486722E-10 7.6387375E-12 A12 3.3311097E-11 -2.7402774E-13 9.6155605E-13 -1.9776236E-13 A14 -8.4080650E-13 -5.2925220E-15 1.4912055E-15 -4.3549424E-16 A16 1.8795194E-15 4.5665704E-17 -4.9979189E-17 1.0590233E-17 A18 2.6203295E-16 -5.4618654E-20 -1.6864773E-19 9.7772989E-20 A20 -3.1362413E-18 1.7089185E-22 3.3426693E-21 -9.3819791E-22

[0653] [Example 17]

[0654] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 17 are shown in FIG. Figure 35. The variable power optical system of Example 17 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes one lens group having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes one lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power, a fifth subsequent lens group GR5 having positive refractive power, and a sixth subsequent lens group GR6 having negative refractive power.

[0655] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the 3rd subsequent lens group GR3 and the 5th subsequent lens group GR5 are fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes only one focusing group. The focusing group includes the 4th subsequent lens group GR4. When focusing from an infinitely distant object to the closest object, the 4th subsequent lens group GR4 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0656] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 17, basic lens data is shown in Table 49, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 50, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 51, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 52. Figure 36 .

[0657] [Table 49]

[0658] Embodiment 17

[0659] Sn R D Yes etc. θgF ρ 1 73.8202 4.0449 1.48749 70.24 0.53007 2.46 2 161.0715 0.1000 3 65.0133 2.0000 1.80100 34.97 0.58642 3.55 4 43.8333 11.3984 1.43700 95.10 0.53364 3.53 5 -664.3426 DD[5] *6 -169.3314 0.6230 1.80625 40.91 0.56920 *7 46.5902 3.6097 8 -46.7768 1.0834 1.75500 52.32 0.54757 9 41.9068 3.1222 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 10 4919.1482 DD

[10] 11(Wed) ∞ 0.3236 *12 123.4465 3.5216 1.69304 52.93 0.54673 *13 -45.0546 DD

[13] 14 -40.7804 0.7637 1.96300 24.11 0.62126 15 -297.6944 0.1029 16 85.1359 4.4786 1.59522 67.73 0.54426 17 -58.4549 DD

[17] 18 -78.1913 4.3971 1.59522 67.73 0.54426 19 -28.1791 0.6006 20 -292.7246 0.4998 1.75500 52.32 0.54757 21 125.1551 0.2175 22 171.5028 5.4030 1.55032 75.50 0.54001 23 -45.3846 0.8000 1.91082 35.25 0.58224 24 -59.6936 DD

[24] *25 53.7390 0.3569 1.43700 95.10 0.53364 *26 22.2719 DD

[26] 27 63.4191 5.2284 1.48749 70.24 0.53007 28 -35.4053 DD

[28] *29 -25.1524 1.3182 1.51633 64.06 0.53345 *30 220.1715 DD

[30]

[0660] [Table 50]

[0661] Embodiment 17

[0662] Goodbye Middle TV Zr 1.0 2.2 3.6 f 46.53 102.36 165.17 Bf 12.13 16.00 23.89 FNo. 2.88 2.89 2.89 2ω[°] 34.6 15.2 9.2 DD[5] 2.50 46.00 58.91 DD

[10] 14.69 7.09 1.48 DD

[13] 1.58 2.46 0.76 DD

[17] 1.68 0.91 4.51 DD

[24] 10.58 6.42 5.70 DD

[26] 21.51 25.63 26.39 DD

[28] 16.81 12.98 5.07 DD

[30] 12.13 16.00 23.89

[0663] [Table 51]

[0664] Embodiment 17

[0665] Sn 6 7 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -2.9418948E-05 -2.9309869E-05 A6 5.3550887E-07 4.8588739E-07 A8 -4.8147474E-09 -2.9850094E-09 A10 1.5970801E-11 -1.5120065E-11 A12 8.6485042E-14 3.7402476E-13 A14 -8.9085100E-16 -2.2599041E-15 A16 2.0910729E-18 4.7036931E-18

[0666] Sn 12 13 25 26 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -4.8214562E-06 1.0767531E-05 7.5786397E-05 7.4302514E-05 A6 -1.3976123E-08 1.0024874E-08 -1.0413654E-06 -7.4525673E-07 A8 1.3445569E-09 5.9101963E-10 6.4678108E-11 -8.8167987E-09 A10 -2.5665053E-11 -6.1385636E-12 1.7738967E-10 1.8368695E-10 A12 2.2127072E-13 -4.9888147E-14 -1.9645064E-12 2.1154001E-12 A14 -2.3557760E-16 2.0051585E-15 1.8939927E-14 -4.9144551E-14 A16 -9.4015144E-18 -2.0353428E-17 -3.6910421E-16 -9.8007234E-17 A18 6.2817439E-20 9.1891818E-20 3.7529149E-18 5.6184130E-18 A20 -1.2825725E-22 -1.5990668E-22 -1.2731671E-20 -2.5607964E-20

[0667] Sn 29 30 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 2.5147208E-04 2.4921917E-04 A6 -4.4013176E-06 -3.9611257E-06 A8 7.0430710E-08 5.2539854E-08 A10 -8.7243302E-10 -4.6027985E-10 A12 7.1872565E-12 1.7531297E-12 A14 -2.9379137E-14 1.0689208E-14 A16 -3.7984701E-17 -1.7705119E-16 A18 8.8184880E-19 9.2151377E-19 A20 -2.5169360E-21 -1.8075372E-21

[0668] [Example 18]

[0669] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 18 are shown in FIG. Figure 37. The variable power optical system of Example 18 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes one lens group having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes one lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power, a fifth subsequent lens group GR5 having positive refractive power, and a sixth subsequent lens group GR6 having negative refractive power.

[0670] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the 3rd subsequent lens group GR3 and the 5th subsequent lens group GR5 are fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes only one focusing group. The focusing group includes the 4th subsequent lens group GR4. When focusing from an infinitely distant object to the closest object, the 4th subsequent lens group GR4 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0671] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 18, basic lens data are shown in Table 52, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 53, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 54, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 55. Figure 38 .

[0672] [Table 52]

[0673] Embodiment 18

[0674] Sn R D Yes etc. θgF ρ 1 64.7492 4.4420 1.48749 70.24 0.53007 2.46 2 217.2501 0.0510 3 66.8292 3.0412 1.80100 34.97 0.58642 3.55 4 40.5736 7.7261 1.43700 95.10 0.53364 3.53 5 1475.9564 DD[5] *6 102.0071 0.5829 1.76450 49.10 0.55289 *7 36.6538 2.5725 8 -56.5479 0.5637 1.79952 42.22 0.56727 9 36.8397 2.4340 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 10 201.4557 DD

[10] 11(Wed) ∞ 0.2001 *12 34.9467 4.4406 1.76450 49.10 0.55289 *13 -46.0105 DD

[13] 14 -24.7453 0.5241 1.92286 18.90 0.64960 15 181.2637 2.4484 16 200.4639 2.3364 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 17 -57.0600 DD

[17] 18 -74.6940 4.7879 1.64000 60.08 0.53704 19 -22.9469 0.0895 20 180.4840 4.7709 1.55032 75.50 0.54001 21 -17.7913 0.4993 1.83481 42.74 0.56490 22 -73.0918 0.0497 23 82.1621 1.2263 1.49710 81.56 0.53848 24 152.5057 DD

[24] *25 60.8444 0.5085 1.43700 95.10 0.53364 *26 15.4433 DD

[26] 27 44.3244 4.5548 1.48749 70.24 0.53007 28 -30.8503 DD

[28] *29 -83.4941 0.5466 1.51633 64.06 0.53345 *30 24.5946 DD

[30]

[0675] [Table 53]

[0676] Embodiment 18

[0677] Goodbye Middle TV Zr 1.0 1.9 3.8 f 35.83 68.08 135.44 Bf 12.26 18.57 23.34 FNo. 2.88 2.88 2.90 2ω[°] 44.0 22.2 11.0 DD[5] 0.10 30.42 53.36 DD

[10] 26.78 19.52 2.11 DD

[13] 2.16 4.04 4.37 DD

[17] 1.80 1.30 1.51 DD

[24] 1.07 1.45 0.75 DD

[26] 14.48 14.10 14.80 DD

[28] 11.97 5.66 0.90 DD

[30] 12.26 18.57 23.34

[0678] [Table 54]

[0679] Embodiment 18

[0680] Sn 6 7 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -3.1592864E-07 3.0436714E-07 A6 1.5182954E-08 8.2148672E-09 A8 -1.8829122E-11 2.8365227E-11 A10 2.0905485E-14 4.3160364E-14 A12 9.4794587E-17 1.9034624E-16

[0681] Sn 12 13 25 26 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -9.7443122E-07 9.8994537E-06 5.5079673E-05 4.7817467E-05 A6 3.6303160E-09 -7.3015858E-08 -1.8000128E-06 -1.1846569E-06 A8 -4.7494904E-10 3.1386937E-10 1.7083705E-08 -2.7660595E-09 A10 1.3621083E-13 3.1410456E-12 7.5169742E-11 1.8049427E-10 A12 9.0068040E-14 -4.0194542E-15 -2.7103770E-12 1.3833741E-12 A14 -3.7814678E-16 -4.0323906E-16 3.5639401E-15 -3.6180074E-14 A16 -7.7691246E-18 1.0180768E-18 3.6670036E-16 -3.1849112E-16 A18 7.1851767E-20 1.4801806E-20 -3.9517856E-18 7.2382627E-18 A20 -1.6911638E-22 -5.8447902E-23 1.4112414E-20 -2.5203359E-20

[0682] Sn 29 30 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 1.3138602E-05 2.4076222E-05 A6 -2.8843437E-07 -4.8167133E-07 A8 3.1204065E-09 5.6716717E-09 A10 -8.2694962E-12 2.6321563E-11 A12 4.1193024E-13 -1.1496311E-12 A14 -9.5789799E-15 9.0295212E-15 A16 3.0185264E-17 -3.7452221E-17 A18 4.7632403E-19 2.2359969E-19 A20 -2.6539131E-21 -8.8621451E-22

[0683] [Example 19]

[0684] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 19 are shown in FIG. Figure 39. The variable power optical system of Example 19 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes, from the object side to the image side, a first front lens group GF1 having positive refractive power and a second front lens group GF2 having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes a lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power, and a fifth subsequent lens group GR5 having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes the above-mentioned Lp1 lens, Ln1 lens, Ln2 lens, and Lp2 lens.

[0685] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the 2nd front lens group GF2 and the 1st subsequent lens group GR1 are fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes two focusing groups. The focusing group on the object side includes the 2nd subsequent lens group GR2, and the focusing group on the image side includes the 4th subsequent lens group GR4. When focusing from an object at infinity to the nearest object, the 2nd subsequent lens group GR2 moves toward the object side, the 4th subsequent lens group GR4 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0686] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 19, basic lens data are shown in Table 55, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 56, aspheric coefficients are shown in Tables 57A and 57B, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 57A. Figure 40 The effective diameter of each surface of the Lp1 lens, the Ln1 lens, the Ln2 lens, and the Lp2 lens is shown in the ED column of the table of basic lens data.

[0687] [Table 55]

[0688] Embodiment 19

[0689] Sn R D Yes etc. θgF ρ ED 1 63.6643 1.5000 1.85025 30.05 0.59797 4.00 2 46.2727 7.7166 1.49782 82.57 0.53862 3.86 3 -1105.6823 DD[3] 4 44.6687 3.9080 1.49782 82.57 0.53862 3.86 5 198.4948 DD[5] *6 -118.0555 1.0000 1.83220 40.10 0.57151 *7 36.0460 3.1043 8 -72.1032 0.5707 1.60300 65.44 0.54022 9 39.6678 2.1516 1.92286 20.88 0.63900 10 128.2158 DD

[10] 11(Wed) ∞ 0.3281 *12 -717.0050 2.7917 1.61881 63.85 0.54182 *13 -36.7800 DD

[13] 14 -17.7129 0.5687 1.63930 44.87 0.56843 15 49.6688 2.9070 1.89286 20.36 0.63944 16 -106.9286 DD

[16] 17 29.1250 4.6547 1.52841 76.45 0.53954 18 -71.9444 0.8000 1.96300 24.11 0.62126 19 69.7790 4.0930 1.43875 94.66 0.53402 20 -38.0547 0.8702 *21 31.0069 4.4552 1.61881 63.85 0.54182 23.244 *22 -51.4873 DD

[22] 22.800 *23 -544.6314 1.0000 1.55332 71.68 0.54029 17.780 *24 18.3643 DD

[24] 16.600 *25 -44.7400 0.7086 1.58913 61.15 0.53824 20.411 *26 -65.9629 0.1000 21.210 27 46.6687 1.7500 1.51633 64.14 0.53531 23.156 28 ∞ DD

[28] 23.200

[0690] [Table 56]

[0691] Embodiment 19

[0692] Goodbye Middle TV Zr 1.0 2.3 3.8 f 35.70 82.11 135.65 Bf 22.10 25.52 31.13 FNo. 2.90 2.90 2.90 2ω[°] 46.0 19.4 11.6 DD[3] 0.20 24.44 33.53 DD[5] 0.99 14.08 20.44 DD

[10] 20.45 7.35 0.99 DD

[13] 5.31 8.28 9.34 DD

[16] 8.52 4.50 0.98 DD

[22] 11.15 10.57 6.52 DD

[24] 14.35 12.55 13.45 DD

[28] 22.10 25.52 31.13

[0693] [Table 57A]

[0694] Embodiment 19

[0695] Sn 6 7 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 2.4503638E-06 -1.3399069E-07 A6 -5.6706582E-09 -2.1893698E-09 A8 -5.2426606E-12 -4.4089817E-11 A10 1.4033133E-13 3.5871218E-13

[0696] Sn 21 22 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -1.0502198E-05 1.1786090E-05 A6 1.2486938E-08 1.5795954E-08 A8 3.1180167E-10 1.5664610E-10 A10 -2.8074570E-12 -5.0269361E-13 A12 3.8432368E-15 -1.0465738E-14 A14 3.6256731E-17 -9.7926920E-18 A16 6.7357837E-20 1.1425073E-18 A18 8.4531996E-22 -2.7860292E-21

[0697] [Table 57B]

[0698] Embodiment 19

[0699] Sn 12 13 25 26 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 A4 4.2883825E-06 -5.5427938E-06 -9.1710499E-05 -1.0167302E-04 A5 8.2140420E-07 2.7642317E-06 -5.4817595E-06 -1.4635602E-07 A6 -1.4325297E-07 -4.9025439E-07 7.7206192E-07 2.5347364E-07 A7 -1.5168154E-08 -2.0666587E-09 -5.4986359E-08 -9.5235166E-09 A8 8.2894828E-09 7.8602516E-09 2.4407678E-09 -4.7080772E-09 A9 -3.6923479E-10 5.2277005E-11 -1.0829710E-10 -7.6804479E-11 A10 1.9478741E-11 -4.1619193E-11 -5.0448994E-11 3.8624454E-11 A11 -1.1061563E-11 -2.7107838E-12 -7.8921489E-12 1.5298531E-12 A12 1.6479430E-13 -7.3236347E-13 1.0679661E-12 -2.8243810E-13 A13 8.9162605E-14 8.7923330E-14 4.2160063E-14 -5.9146937E-15 A14 -5.5033878E-15 -3.0482386E-15 3.5907718E-15 2.6494679E-15 A15 8.3731816E-16 1.5227788E-15 6.0690341E-17 -7.1543058E-17 A16 6.4278157E-17 -5.9807287E-17 -9.8534727E-17 2.1243333E-17 A17 -2.0985318E-17 -1.2541068E-17 4.5356254E-18 2.5178688E-18 A18 2.4057451E-19 7.0358482E-19 3.3544380E-19 -5.4365800E-19 A19 1.0310691E-19 -6.4330501E-21 -1.3452407E-19 -2.6124421E-20 A20 -3.8603853E-21 5.8627205E-22 8.4337592E-21 3.3644774E-21

[0700] Sn 23 24 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 A4 3.0963867E-05 2.9872814E-05 A5 -2.2479310E-06 -6.2052185E-06 A6 -4.0877355E-07 2.7991157E-07 A7 2.4313112E-08 -3.3356067E-08 A8 -2.8194986E-09 7.4861484E-11 A9 1.0385896E-09 -5.9663247E-11 A10 2.3435761E-11 1.6814351E-10 A11 -9.2975905E-12 -1.2088824E-11 A12 -4.8834535E-13 -1.1892928E-13 A13 4.8972337E-14 -4.6583413E-14 A14 -4.2785946E-15 3.7386896E-15 A15 1.2137864E-15 3.9717568E-16 A16 -6.9141332E-17 -2.8629046E-17

[0701] [Example 20]

[0702] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 20 are shown in FIG. Figure 41 . The variable power optical system of Example 20 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes, from the object side to the image side, a first front lens group GF1 having positive refractive power and a second front lens group GF2 having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes a lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power, and a fifth subsequent lens group GR5 having positive refractive power. The rear group GR includes the above-mentioned Ln2 lens and Lp2 lens.

[0703] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the 2nd front lens group GF2, the 1st subsequent lens group GR1 and the 5th subsequent lens group GR5 are fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes two focusing groups. The focusing group on the object side includes the 2nd subsequent lens group GR2, and the focusing group on the image side includes the 4th subsequent lens group GR4. When focusing from an object at infinity to the nearest object, the 2nd subsequent lens group GR2 moves toward the object side, the 4th subsequent lens group GR4 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0704] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 20, basic lens data is shown in Table 58, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 59, aspheric coefficients are shown in Tables 60A and 60B, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 60A. Figure 42 The effective diameter of each surface of the Ln2 lens and the Lp2 lens is shown in the FD column of the basic lens data table.

[0705] [Table 58]

[0706] Embodiment 20

[0707] Sn R D Yes etc. θgF ρ ED 1 72.2134 3.4287 1.48749 70.32 0.52917 2.45 2 167.8338 0.0322 3 105.5580 1.5000 1.80100 34.97 0.58642 3.55 4 52.8734 5.9222 1.49782 82.57 0.53862 3.86 5 529.8762 DD[5] 6 47.1072 4.2090 1.51680 64.20 0.53430 2.52 7 308.8563 DD[7] *8 -321.9759 1.0000 1.83220 40.10 0.57151 *9 33.3477 3.0831 10 -45.6742 0.5796 1.60300 65.44 0.54022 11 39.4989 2.3109 1.92286 20.88 0.63900 12 166.0650 DD

[12] 13(Wed) ∞ 0.3281 *14 77.0433 3.2002 1.61881 63.85 0.54182 *15 -50.7660 DD

[15] 16 -20.7351 0.8307 1.63930 44.87 0.56843 17 82.5328 2.0386 1.89286 20.36 0.63944 18 -282.7252 DD

[18] 19 42.6512 3.7733 1.52841 76.45 0.53954 20 -83.4665 0.0348 21 -141.3162 0.8000 1.96300 24.11 0.62126 22 71.6595 0.7317 23 78.2930 4.3869 1.43875 94.66 0.53402 24 -34.9580 0.0223 *25 31.6446 4.3531 1.61881 63.85 0.54182 *26 -72.9604 DD

[26] *27 668.1837 1.0000 1.55332 71.68 0.54029 *28 19.1957 DD

[28] *29 -127.1531 0.8958 1.58913 61.15 0.53824 21.855 *30 -290.1611 0.1000 22.600 31 -1338.4451 2.6014 1.51633 64.14 0.53531 23.513 32 -52.6676 24.9700 23.752

[0708] [Table 59]

[0709] Embodiment 20

[0710] Goodbye Middle TV Zr 1.0 2.3 3.8 f 35.70 82.11 135.66 Bf 24.97 24.97 24.97 FNo. 2.91 2.91 2.91 2ω[°] 46.6 19.4 11.6 DD[5] 0.20 22.17 37.52 DD[7] 2.24 17.09 23.29 DD

[12] 22.04 7.19 0.99 DD

[15] 3.15 6.41 7.63 DD

[18] 8.55 4.16 1.00 DD

[26] 12.39 13.09 9.35 DD

[28] 9.33 9.77 15.44

[0711] [Table 60A]

[0712] Embodiment 20

[0713] Sn 8 9 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -6.0717237E-08 -1.7142088E-09 A6 -6.3603767E-11 7.9006256E-10 A8 -3.1416008E-13 -2.8396798E-12 A10 5.0835013E-15 -5.1686117E-14

[0714] Sn 25 26 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -5.5880608E-06 7.3477021E-06 A6 1.6072187E-08 2.7265997E-08 A8 3.2065171E-10 1.0932971E-10 A10 -2.8772914E-12 -7.2865317E-13 A12 3.2632890E-15 -1.1077768E-14 A14 2.7763631E-17 -4.1514135E-18 A16 1.1641822E-19 1.2548798E-18 A18 1.4601927E-21 -2.5377203E-21

[0715] [Table 60B]

[0716] Embodiment 20

[0717] Sn 14 15 29 30 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 A4 3.4693386E-06 -8.0193487E-06 -9.8004327E-05 -9.4107754E-05 A5 8.8549036E-07 3.2696328E-06 -2.7923123E-06 -4.9533800E-06 A6 -1.5596765E-07 -5.2330311E-07 3.0554511E-07 5.7766640E-07 A7 -1.6352312E-08 -3.3510239E-09 -4.6279702E-08 -1.4615413E-08 A8 8.2756652E-09 7.8624431E-09 3.4174970E-09 -3.3323603E-09 A9 -3.6941140E-10 5.4383546E-11 1.4916171E-10 -1.0446073E-10 A10 1.9707224E-11 -4.1161445E-11 -3.8992635E-11 4.3231049E-11 A11 -1.1046265E-11 -2.6863675E-12 -7.0332795E-12 1.0948081E-12 A12 1.6656446E-13 -7.3030971E-13 9.1655179E-13 -2.2326761E-13 A13 8.9307377E-14 8.8021747E-14 2.8934676E-14 -6.3523636E-15 A14 -5.4936960E-15 -3.0408636E-15 2.7481910E-15 1.3152342E-15 A15 8.3763772E-16 1.5226694E-15 1.1447307E-16 -5.5675510E-17 A16 6.4292460E-17 -5.9780650E-17 -1.0875167E-16 2.2974773E-17 A17 -2.0988079E-17 -1.2546188E-17 4.0359741E-18 2.4214660E-18 A18 2.4027691E-19 7.0283641E-19 2.4775580E-19 -6.2722023E-19 A19 1.0311810E-19 -6.4496657E-21 -1.1230455E-19 -2.4603751E-20 A20 -3.8702879E-21 5.8510430E-22 8.1019914E-21 3.9240041E-21

[0718] Sn 27 28 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 A4 3.1986726E-05 4.2869246E-05 A5 -2.4480244E-06 -6.6731888E-06 A6 -4.1954190E-07 2.8016205E-07 A7 2.4653131E-08 -3.0641397E-08 A8 -3.1256153E-09 1.9123232E-11 A9 9.7781326E-10 -1.3537363E-10 A10 1.3981291E-11 1.6004878E-10 A11 -9.5494948E-12 -1.3943211E-11 A12 -4.7128278E-13 -2.9912163E-14 A13 5.5484602E-14 -7.1583628E-14 A14 -2.3816955E-15 1.1948658E-14 A15 1.3349881E-15 3.4916975E-16 A16 -9.3196945E-17 -6.4873760E-17

[0719] [Example 21]

[0720] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 21 are shown in FIG. Figure 43 . The variable power optical system of Example 21 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes one lens group having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes one lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power, a fifth subsequent lens group GR5 having positive refractive power, and a sixth subsequent lens group GR6 having negative refractive power.

[0721] When zooming from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the 6th subsequent lens group GR6 is fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes only one focusing group. The focusing group includes the 4th subsequent lens group GR4. When focusing from an infinitely distant object to the closest object, the 4th subsequent lens group GR4 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0722] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 21, basic lens data is shown in Table 61, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 62, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 63, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 64. Figure 44 .

[0723] [Table 61]

[0724] Embodiment 21

[0725] Sn R D Yes etc. θgF ρ 1 65.7982 1.5000 1.85026 32.35 0.59472 4.37 2 48.6483 8.7565 1.49782 82.57 0.53862 3.86 3 1884.3744 0.1000 4 82.2933 3.8449 1.51680 64.20 0.53430 2.52 5 342.2675 DD[5] 6 -110.2202 0.7000 1.96300 24.11 0.62126 7 22.9712 3.3076 8 -22.4307 0.8100 1.59522 67.73 0.54426 9 27.7898 4.7552 1.96300 24.11 0.62126 10 -51.0039 DD

[10] 11(St) ∞ 0.4700 *12 31.5157 5.0814 1.49710 81.56 0.53848 *13 -35.5646 DD

[13] 14 -19.1306 1.4002 1.85150 40.78 0.56958 15 -84.0917 6.0837 1.53775 74.70 0.53936 16 -19.7584 DD

[16] *17 -41.5474 2.8215 1.76450 49.10 0.55289 *18 -24.9443 0.1000 19 37.6470 3.8310 1.59522 67.73 0.54426 20 -55.0879 0.8748 1.95375 32.32 0.59056 21 -509.5966 DD

[21] 22 284.1274 0.4748 1.75500 52.32 0.54757 23 31.9578 DD

[23] *24 63.8598 3.0002 1.51633 64.06 0.53345 *25 -472.4747 DD

[25] 26 -139.2708 0.7498 1.48749 70.24 0.53007 27 -192.3210 DD

[27]

[0726] [Table 62]

[0727] Embodiment 21

[0728] Wide Middle Tele Zr 1.0 2.1 3.8 f 34.66 72.78 129.96 Bf 15.40 15.40 15.40 FNo. 2.91 2.91 2.91 2ω[°] 47.4 22.0 12.4 DD[5] 2.52 38.79 53.53 DD

[10] 13.19 9.38 0.99 DD

[13] 1.99 4.38 2.16 DD

[16] 10.52 7.30 5.40 DD

[21] 5.51 3.04 0.99 DD

[23] 5.27 18.96 38.60 DD

[25] 23.02 16.18 5.84 DD

[27] 15.40 15.48 15.48

[0729] [Table 63]

[0730] Embodiment 21

[0731] Sn 12 13 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 A4 1.3733527E-06 1.2381000E-05 A5 -8.5251559E-07 -1.3600105E-06 A6 -8.9222982E-08 1.0037070E-07 A7 1.6496490E-08 2.8522941E-09 A8 -2.2557348E-11 -1.3862027E-10 A9 7.2996958E-11 -3.4975975E-10 A10 -3.4085610E-11 4.3869770E-11 A11 -4.9426960E-13 2.3118814E-12 A12 7.3384867E-13 -8.4567623E-13 A13 -7.7804427E-14 5.9443508E-14 A14 -7.1019095E-16 -5.0012112E-15 A15 7.0070534E-16 6.6685238E-16 A]6 -3.6651572E-17 -3.1994328E-17

[0732] Sn 17 18 24 25 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -1.2791616E-05 -3.8694694E-06 9.5778001E-06 5.3620321E-06 A6 -4.1074038E-08 -4.3023237E-08 3.4834467E-09 -1.4978239E-08 A8 -1.3959856E-10 5.9645573E-1] 1.3984279E-10 2.8037324E-10 A10 -1.0881683E-14 -1.0867216E-12 -1.5716450E-12 -2.0796147E-12 A12 -3.9704680E-15 -3.6808952E-16 5.9081611E-15 6.7245992E-15

[0733] [Example 22]

[0734] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 22 are shown in FIG. Figure 45 . The variable power optical system of Example 22 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes, from the object side to the image side, a first front lens group GF1 having positive refractive power and a second front lens group GF2 having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes a lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power, and a fifth subsequent lens group GR5 having negative refractive power.

[0735] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the 2nd front lens group GF2, the 1st subsequent lens group GR1, the 3rd subsequent lens group GR3 and the 5th subsequent lens group GR5 are fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes only one focusing group. The focusing group includes the 4th subsequent lens group GR4. When focusing from an object at infinity to the closest object, the 4th subsequent lens group GR4 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0736] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 22, basic lens data is shown in Table 64, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 65, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 66, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 67. Figure 46 .

[0737] [Table 64]

[0738] Embodiment 22

[0739] Sn R D Nd vd θgF ρ 1 79.0584 1.2580 1.83400 37.18 0.57780 4.28 2 52.4167 8.0898 1.43700 95.10 0.53364 3.53 3 -427.3565 DD[3] 4 48.9937 0.9118 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 3.59 5 47.4372 5.1355 1.53775 74.70 0.53936 3.64 6 -277.8738 DD[6] 7 -267.1905 0.5454 1.75500 52.32 0.54757 8 33.2088 3.0346 9 -36.0624 0.5328 1.80400 46.53 0.55775 10 32.0405 2.7732 1.96300 24.11 0.62126 11 ∞ DD

[11] 12(St) ∞ 0.5000 *13 61.9889 3.8559 1.61881 63.85 0.54182 *14 -24.9073 DD

[14] 15 -21.8585 0.5037 1.95375 32.32 0.59056 16 248.6479 0.0581 17 42.4899 1.7870 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 18 129.3072 DD

[18] 19 -351.0226 3.1299 1.80400 46.53 0.55775 20 -26.1696 0.0328 21 52.3106 5.0752 1.59522 67.73 0.54426 22 -19.7439 0.5398 1.96300 24.11 0.62126 23 -55.5460 0.0328 24 48.3157 2.0911 1.77535 50.31 0.55042 25 463.7302 DD

[25] 26 36.5254 0.5304 1.80400 46.53 0.55775 27 14.3154 DD

[27] 28 -445.3953 0.6166 1.88300 39.22 0.57288 29 14.4436 8.3324 1.68893 31.07 0.60041 30 -31.4386 4.4755 *31 -18.6371 0.7212 1.51633 64.06 0.53345 *32 -42.4235 11.6100

[0740] [Table 65]

[0741] Embodiment 22

[0742] Wide Middle Tele Zr 1.0 2.0 3.8 f 36.00 72.00 135.36 Bf 11.61 11.61 11.61 FNo. 2.91 2.91 2.91 2ω[°] 45.4 21.2 11.4 DD[3] 1.02 33.97 59.50 DD[6] 1.03 12.75 20.77 DD

[11] 20.74 9.02 1.01 DD

[14] 4.24 4.51 5.40 DD

[18] 7.23 6.96 6.06 DD

[25] 5.63 5.25 1.02 DD

[27] 8.95 9.34 13.56

[0743] [Table 66]

[0744] Embodiment 22

[0745] Sn 13 14 31 32 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A3 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 0.0000000E+00 A4 -5.2945484E-06 1.6574170E-05 5.7547515E-05 8.4757151E-06 A5 5.9920474E-08 -1.3716303E-07 -1.0322219E-05 -6.6503110E-06 A6 -5.6377109E-08 -3.2327311E-08 5.1695548E-07 -1.4545709E-07 A7 2.0741106E-09 1.6860024E-09 3.7175732E-08 1.0392871E-08 A8 -7.6825703E-11 2.5389737E-10 -3.7887681E-09 5.6750053E-09 A9 -5.2180175E-11 -6.8068162E-11 4.3957619E-10 -2.7155366E-12 A10 9.1653911E-12 1.5900141E-12 -2.0322971E-11 -3.0378906E-11 A11 -1.8486408E-13 -1.7393117E-13 -2.7608039E-12 2.5211527E-12 A12 -5.0857175E-14 5.0783371E-14 1.0313417E-13 -5.3350166E-13 A13 -5.8026921E-16 -1.0769529E-15 4.6193711E-14 6.4695020E-15 A14 -2.0119238E-16 -2.2215401E-16 -5.0749352E-15 2.1647127E-15 A15 4.1221369E-17 -2.8242486E-17 -7.5458570E-17 -1.0083533E-17 A16 1.1271243E-18 4.5478861E-18 1.5649311E-17 -3.9763506E-18

[0746] [Example 23]

[0747] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 23 are shown in FIG. Figure 47 . The variable power optical system of Example 23 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes, from the object side to the image side, a first front lens group GF1 having positive refractive power and a second front lens group GF2 having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes a lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power, a fifth subsequent lens group GR5 having positive refractive power, and a sixth subsequent lens group GR6 having negative refractive power.

[0748] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the 2nd front lens group GF2, the 1st subsequent lens group GR1, the 3rd subsequent lens group GR3 and the 5th subsequent lens group GR5 are fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes only one focusing group. The focusing group includes the 4th subsequent lens group GR4. When focusing from an object at infinity to the closest object, the 4th subsequent lens group GR4 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0749] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 23, basic lens data is shown in Table 67, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 68, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 69, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 60. Figure 48 .

[0750] [Table 67]

[0751] Embodiment 23

[0752] Sn R D Nd vd 0gF ρ 1 86.9279 1.3245 1.78590 44.20 0.56317 4.40 2 50.2681 9.6841 1.43700 95.10 0.53364 3.53 3 -282.1839 DD[3] 4 56.7459 5.6826 1.51680 64.20 0.53430 2.52 5 -151.2318 DD[5] *6 200.9343 0.5187 1.58913 61.15 0.53824 *7 30.2670 3.2424 8 -32.7976 0.5273 1.77535 50.31 0.55042 9 31.5129 2.8347 1.85896 22.73 0.62844 10 -1087.5270 DD

[10] 11(St) ∞ 0.3000 *12 71.9890 2.8726 1.61881 63.85 0.54182 *13 -41.7770 DD

[13] 14 -26.0862 0.9000 1.80518 25.42 0.61616 15 118.1459 0.4794 16 118.7622 3.4857 1.58913 61.13 0.54067 17 -30.8289 DD

[17] 18 -43.1453 1.5011 1.89286 20.36 0.63944 19 -33.3882 0.0499 20 229.6273 3.6408 1.59282 68.62 0.54414 21 -27.3950 0.5555 1.80400 46.53 0.55775 22 -45.8614 0.0498 23 75.6986 2.6782 1.43700 95.10 0.53364 24 -64.0390 DD

[24] *25 40.6533 0.4980 1.74320 49.29 0.55303 *26 18.6674 DD

[26] 27 -157.9359 1.0066 1.48749 70.24 0.53007 28 27.1682 6.5947 1.71700 47.93 0.56062 29 -32.9392 DD

[29] 30 -30.5043 1.0000 1.77535 50.31 0.55042 31 139.4621 DD

[31]

[0753] [Table 68]

[0754] Embodiment 23

[0755] Wide Middle Tele Zr 1.0 2.0 3.8 f 35.87 71.73 135.57 Bf 10.98 18.98 22.56 FNo. 2.88 2.88 2.89 2ω[°] 44.0 21.0 11.2 DD[3] 0.10 38.31 59.63 DD[5] 1.73 12.02 22.52 DD

[10] 21.90 11.60 1.11 DD

[13] 8.22 2.42 1.60 DD

[17] 0.10 5.89 6.71 DD

[24] 3.27 7.47 2.15 DD

[26] 13.06 8.86 14.18 DD

[29] 12.23 4.24 0.65 DD

[31] 10.98 18.98 22.56

[0756] [Table 69]

[0757] Embodiment 23

[0758] Sn 6 7 12 13 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -3.9661623E-05 -4.1729047E-05 -1.5303889E-05 2.9722423E-06 A6 1.1811876E-06 1.0167806E-06 -1.8251446E-07 -2.6867519E-07 A8 -1.5149288E-08 -7.6085442E-09 2.1740556E-09 4.9880841E-09 A10 7.9732116E-11 -6.1723058E-11 -5.1029639E-11 -1.0675988E-10 A12 1.8869820E-13 1.4473347E-12 9.5331036E-15 6.1346869E-13 A14 -5.5754506E-16 -8.3599906E-15 3.6852405E-15 2.2815153E-15 A16 -6.7655071E-17 4.3737141E-17 9.4539041E-18 -2.1724495E-17 A18 6.7015751E-19 -5.7906178E-19 -4.4782205E-19 -2.0534774E-19 A20 -1.9464048E-21 2.8746323E-21 1.1862997E-21 9.8571684E-22

[0759] Sn 25 26 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 5.4791213E-05 5.6189093E-05 A6 -1.4321947E-06 -1.4743658E-06 A8 1.5462404E-08 2.2898369E-08 A10 1.7471214E-10 -2.5565700E-10 A12 -7.2159875E-12 2.9438104E-12 A14 5.8323172E-14 -8.7543140E-15 A16 4.5908244E-16 -8.0053264E-16 A18 -9.8377935E-18 1.3745778E-17 A20 4.3602138E-20 -6.7048605E-20

[0760] [Example 24]

[0761] The structure and movement trajectory of the variable magnification optical system of Example 24 are shown in Figure 49 . The variable power optical system of Example 24 includes, from the object side to the image side, a front group GF, a middle group GM, and a rear group GR. The front group GF includes one lens group having positive refractive power. The middle group GM includes one lens group having negative refractive power. The rear group GR includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group GR1 having positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group GR2 having positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group GR3 having positive refractive power, a fourth subsequent lens group GR4 having negative refractive power, a fifth subsequent lens group GR5 having positive refractive power, and a sixth subsequent lens group GR6 having negative refractive power.

[0762] When changing the magnification from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end, the 3rd subsequent lens group GR3 and the 5th subsequent lens group GR5 are fixed relative to the image plane Sim, and the other lens groups change the intervals with the adjacent lens groups and move. The zoom optical system includes only one focusing group. The focusing group includes the 4th subsequent lens group GR4. When focusing from an infinitely distant object to the closest object, the 4th subsequent lens group GR4 moves toward the image side, and the other lens groups are fixed relative to the image plane Sim. The anti-vibration group includes the middle group GM.

[0763] Regarding the variable magnification optical system of Example 24, basic lens data is shown in Table 70, specifications and variable surface intervals are shown in Table 71, aspheric coefficients are shown in Table 72, and various aberration diagrams are shown in Table 73. Figure 50 .

[0764] [Table 70]

[0765] Embodiment 24

[0766] Sn R D Nd vd θgF ρ 1 82.0658 5.4759 1.48749 70.24 0.53007 2.46 2 622.1894 0.1000 3 73.5391 2.0000 1.80100 34.97 0.58642 3.55 4 44.4637 10.3650 1.43700 95.10 0.53364 3.53 5 -1529.4162 DD[5] *6 -122.2773 0.8168 1.80625 40.91 0.56920 *7 43.0390 3.2988 8 -47.8052 0.4793 1.75500 52.32 0.54757 9 35.3057 3.3724 1.95906 17.47 0.65993 10 -446.1308 DD

[10] 11(St) ∞ 1.8505 *12 61.6224 3.1101 1.69304 52.93 0.54673 *13 -94.6842 DD

[13] 14 -45.3927 0.5029 1.96300 24.11 0.62126 15 315.1619 0.0489 16 54.9999 5.1770 1.59522 67.73 0.54426 17 -31.8274 DD

[17] 18 -44.2682 1.2892 1.59522 67.73 0.54426 19 -38.9493 0.3515 20 -3347.2260 0.6013 1.75500 52.32 0.54757 21 157.7244 0.4913 22 72.8418 3.8172 1.55032 75.50 0.54001 23 -32.9560 0.8000 1.91082 35.25 0.58224 24 -52.1504 DD

[24] *25 36.0836 0.6112 1.43700 95.10 0.53364 *26 17.5442 DD

[26] 27 52.9720 5.3020 1.48749 70.24 0.53007 28 -34.4929 DD

[28] *29 -22.4953 0.9183 1.51633 64.06 0.53345 *30 198.6174 DD

[30]

[0767] [Table 71]

[0768] Embodiment 24

[0769] Wide Middle Tele Zr 1.0 2.2 3.3 f 46.15 101.53 152.29 Bf 10.99 16.99 22.01 FNo. 2.88 2.88 2.87 2ω[°] 34.4 15.0 10.0 DD[5] 1.83 47.37 60.11 DD

[10] 10.27 6.02 0.69 DD

[13] 1.47 2.16 2.45 DD

[17] 4.31 3.06 2.79 DD

[24] 8.94 4.95 2.09 DD

[26] 20.13 24.46 26.82 DD

[28] 17.17 10.71 6.35 DD

[30] 10.99 16.99 22.01

[0770] [Table 72]

[0771] Embodiment 24

[0772] Sn 6 7 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 -3.3827595E-05 -3.5263054E-05 A6 5.2706852E-07 4.6472979E-07 A8 -4.8014137E-09 -2.9780937E-09 A10 1.5985679E-11 -1.5148597E-11 A12 8.6236712E-14 3.7394692E-13 A14 -8.9175808E-16 -2.2566110E-15 A16 2.1111652E-18 4.7143463E-18

[0773] Sn 12 13 25 26 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 3.2187312E-06 1.8750831E-05 7.2292880E-05 6.4773524E-05 A6 -7.2312947E-09 1.5052470E-08 -1.0464306E-06 -7.2733824E-07 A8 1.3604904E-09 5.6154798E-10 1.5830268E-10 -8.8961983E-09 A10 -2.5821712E-11 -6.0553164E-12 1.7747624E-10 1.8280454E-10 A12 2.2107859E-13 -5.0066002E-14 -1.9663228E-12 2.1030732E-12 A14 -2.3688980E-16 2.0024263E-15 1.8933730E-14 -4.9102420E-14 A16 -9.4067921E-18 -2.0364515E-17 -3.6909421E-16 -9.7288912E-17 A18 6.2727240E-20 9.1840653E-20 3.7534281E-18 5.6340811E-18 A20 -1.2879702E-22 -1.6020780E-22 -1.2697247E-20 -2.5654207E-20

[0774] Sn 29 30 KA 1.0000000E+00 1.0000000E+00 A4 2.6575748E-04 2.5651525E-04 A6 -4.4619315E-06 -3.9315229E-06 A8 7.0886125E-08 5.2695476E-08 A10 -8.7416057E-10 -4.6758153E-10 A12 7.1836680E-12 1.7915042E-12 A14 -2.9310466E-14 1.0815507E-14 A16 -3.9780870E-17 -1.7842569E-16 A18 8.8894836E-19 9.1412431E-19 A20 -2.4948124E-21 -1.7446793E-21

[0775] Tables 73 to 82 show the corresponding values ​​of conditional expressions (1) to (35A) of the variable power optical systems of Examples 1 to 24. The corresponding values ​​of the examples shown in Tables 73 to 82 can be used as the upper limit or lower limit of the conditional expression to set the preferred range of the conditional expression.

[0776] [Table 73]

[0777] Equation number Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Example 4 Example 5 (1) TLw / (fw×tanωw) 9.0383 8.4386 8.4684 8.3124 7.9166 (2) Bfw / (fw×tanωw) 1.3869 0.9360 0.6973 0.7556 1.1777 (3) Fnot×(TLt / ft) 3.9549 3.6305 3.4072 3.6467 3.1255 (4) <![CDATA[(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 ]]> 0.7729 0.9598 0.5902 0.6903 0.7145 (5) tanωw / Fnow 0.1402 0.0973 0.1695 0.1398 0.1305 (6) TLt / TLw 1.2183 1.4056 1.2830 1.4088 1.2500 (7) fFw / (-fMw) 4.8989 1.7362 4.1183 4.0391 4.3512 (8) TLw / ft 0.9897 0.8815 0.9221 0.8957 0.8593 (9) ft / fw 4.2003 2.6908 4.4992 3.7497 3.4997 (10) fF1 / fw 2.3195 2.2196 3.1177 2.9762 2.6374 (11) fFI / (-fMw) 4.8989 3.3401 4.1183 4.0391 4.3512 (12) <![CDATA[fF1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 ]]> 1.1318 1.3531 1.4698 1.5370 1.4098 (13) <![CDATA[(-fMw) / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 ]]> 0.2310 0.4051 0.3569 0.3805 0.3240 (14) fF1 / (ft / Fnot) 1.8113 2.4169 1.9957 2.2939 2.1930 (15) DDL1STw / fF1 0.6340 0.3872 0.5588 0.2866 0.4192 (16) DDL1STw / TLw 0.3537 0.3623 0.4199 0.2540 0.3676 (17) fw / fRw 0.9123 1.5421 1.2559 1.5160 1.4776 (18) ft / fRt 3.1826 2.2147 4.6399 4.0196 4.6985 (19) <![CDATA[fR1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 ]]> 0.4422 0.6628 0.6242 0.6694 0.7428 (20) fw / fR1 1.1034 0.9198 0.7553 0.7714 0.7196 (21) |fIS / ft| 0.1127 0.2470 0.1683 0.1965 0.1732 (22) Ndn+0.01×vdn 2.08446 2.1507 2.1395 2.2899 2.25529 (23) Ndp+0.01×vdp 2.31240 2.31310 2.19069 2.36050 2.38800

[0778] [Table 74]

[0779] Equation number Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Example 4 Example 5 (24) vdFp_ave 72.87 70.85 67.26 68.67 79.65 (25) dF1 / fF1 0.2519 0.1191 0.1815 0.1434 0.1393 (26) GFave 3.23 3.70 2.91 4.20 3.59 (27) fR1 / fR3 0.2871 - - - - (28) fR1 / (-fR2) 0.5970 - - - - (29) fR1 / (-fR3) - 1.0739 - - - (30) fR2 / (-fR3) - 1.5538 - - - (29A) fR1 / (-fR3) - - - - 1.5360 (30A) fR2 / (-fR3) - - - - 0.9109 (31) fR1 / fR2 - - - - 1.6862 (32) fR2 / fR4 - - - - 0.1233 (27A) fR1 / fR3 - - - - - (32A) fR2 / fR4 - - - - - (33) fR3 / fR5 - - - - - (34) fR4 / fR6 - - - - - (31A) fR1 / fR2 - - 0.1642 - - (35) fR2 / fR3 - - 6.5700 - - (36) fR3 / (-fR4) - - 1.1269 - - (31B) fR1 / fR2 - - - 1.5194 - (37) fR3 / fR4 - - - 0.2439 - (28A) fR1 / (-fR2) - - - - - (35A) fR2 / fR3 - - - - -

[0780] [Table 75]

[0781] Type No. Example 6 Example 7 Example 8 Example 9 Example 10 (1) TLw / (fw×tanωw) 8.8818 8.4437 8.0617 7.6930 8.1365 (2) Bfw / (fw×tanωw) 0.9213 1.7917 0.7514 0.7643 0.9670 (3) Fnot×(TLt / ft) 3.4928 3.3974 3.2917 3.1280 3.6550 (4) <![CDATA[(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 ]]> 0.7086 0.7620 0.9256 0.7901 0.7120 (5) tanωw / Fnow 0.1384 0.1454 0.1002 0.1081 0.1449 (6) TLt / TLw 1.2972 1.2051 1.3217 1.3419 1.3617 (7) fFw / (-fMw) 4.1500 4.6230 1.4891 1.6359 4.3079 (8) TLw / ft 0.9349 0.9688 0.8648 0.8122 0.9161 (9) ft / fw 3.7997 3.6997 2.6907 2.9502 3.7700 (10) fF1 / fw 2.4390 3.0808 2.1709 4.7335 3.0367 (11) fF1 / (-fMw) 4.1500 4.6230 3.5820 4.8755 4.3079 (12) <![CDATA[fF1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 ]]> 1.2512 1.6017 1.3235 2.7559 1.5640 (13) <![CDATA[(-fMw) / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 ]]> 0.3015 0.3465 0.3695 0.5652 0.3631 (14) fF1 / (ft / Fnot) 1.8486 2.4232 2.3237 4.6048 2.3601 (15) DDL1STw / fF1 0.5523 0.4894 0.4631 0.2500 0.3120 (16) DDL1STw / TLw 0.3792 0.4206 0.4321 0.4939 0.2743 (17) fw / fRw 1.1402 1.0412 1.4031 1.2928 1.3614 (18) ft / fRt 2.9940 4.0655 1.7730 1.5288 3.6898 (19) <![CDATA[fR1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 ]]> 0.3292 0.3171 1.1022 0.3871 0.6586 (20) fw / fR1 1.5584 1.6395 0.5531 1.5040 0.7821 (21) |fIS / ft| 0.1547 0.1809 0.2252 0.3291 0.2996 (22) Ndn+0.01×vdn 2.09646 2.13166 2.06757 2.27695 2.05938 (23) Ndp+0.01×vdp 2.31240 2.32352 2.31310 2.38800 2.19069

[0782] [Table 76]

[0783] Type No. Example 6 Example 7 Example 8 Example 9 Example 10 (24) vdFp_ave 72.87 73.39 72.84 88.36 67.26 (25) dF1 / fF1 0.1445 0.1085 0.1480 0.0365 0.1138 (26) GFave 3.25 3.44 3.29 4.11 2.78 (27) fR1 / fR3 - 0.1017 - - - (28) fR1 / (-fR2) - 0.6191 - - - (29) fR1 / (-fR3) - - - - - (30) fR2 / (-fR3) - - - - - (29A) fR1 / (-fR3) - - - - - (30A) fR2 / (-fR3) - - - - - (31) fR1 / fR2 - - - - - (32) fR2 / fR4 - - - - - (27A) fR1 / fR3 - - - 1.1086 - (32A) fR2 / fR4 - - - 1.3997 - (33) fR3 / fR5 - - - - - (34) fR4 / fR6 - - - - - (31A) fR1 / fR2 - - - - 0.1136 (35) fR2 / fR3 - - - - 9.5491 (36) fR3 / (-fR4) - - - - 1.0333 (31B) fR1 / fR2 - - 1.7487 - - (37) fR3 / fR4 - - 0.2503 - - (28A) fR1 / (-fR2) 0.6193 - - - - (35A) fR2 / fR3 0.5958 - - - -

[0784] [Table 77]

[0785] Type No. Embodiment 11 Example 12 Example 13 Embodiment 14 Embodiment 15 (1) TLw / (fw×tanωw) 7.5413 8.0404 7.9241 7.6916 8.0547 (2) Bfw / (fw×tanωw) 0.7535 0.9622 1.0867 0.7421 0.9535 (3) Fnot×(TLt / ft) 3.0309 3.5384 3.9235 3.1227 3.6230 (4) <![CDATA[(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 ]]> 0.7852 0.6945 0.5996 0.7870 0.7059 (5) tanωw / Fnow 0.1107 0.1440 0.1850 0.1155 0.1461 (6) TLt / TLw 1.2908 1.3515 1.4379 1.2967 1.3615 (7) fFw / (-fMw) 3.9579 3.3898 5.0685 3.5350 2.6785 (8) TLw / ft 0.8097 0.8966 0.9376 0.8362 0.9113 (9) ft / fw 2.9903 3.7696 4.5504 3.0600 3.7699 (10) fF1 / fw 2.2631 3.0233 3.7933 2.2769 3.1107 (11) fF1 / (-fMw) 3.9579 3.3898 5.0685 3.5350 2.6785 (12) <![CDATA[fF1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 ]]> 1.3087 1.5572 1.7783 1.3016 1.6021 (13) <![CDATA[(-fMw) / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 ]]> 0.3306 0.4594 0.3508 0.3682 0.5981 (14) fF1 / (ft / OFnot) 2.1947 2.3419 2.4258 2.1430 2.4095 (15) DDL1STw / fF1 0.4180 0.3022 0.3389 0.3459 0.3202 (16) DDL1STw / TLw 0.3906 0.2703 0.3013 0.3078 0.2899 (17) fw / fRw 2.2564 1.2029 0.9778 1.5666 1.4197 (18) ft / fRt 5.0687 3.2393 3.8301 3.7412 3.8932 (19) <![CDATA[fR1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 ]]> 0.7180 7.5241 0.8166 0.5872 0.6267 (20) fw / fR1 0.8054 0.0685 0.5741 0.9736 0.8218 (21) |fIS / ft| 0.1912 0.2366 0.1645 0.2105 0.3081 (22) Ndn+0.01×vdn 2.25529 2.05938 2.2058 2.0561 2.05938 (23) Ndp+0.01×vdp 2.38800 2.19069 2.31240 2.38800 2.19069

[0786] [Table 78]

[0787] Type No. Embodiment 11 Example 12 Example 13 Embodiment 14 Embodiment 15 (24) vdFp_ave 85.30 67.26 72.87 82.67 67.26 (25) dF1 / fF1 0.1354 0.1147 0.1425 0.1566 0.1110 (26) GFave 4.12 2.78 3.47 2.97 2.78 (27) fR1 / fR3 - - - - - (28) fR1 / (-fR2) - - - - - (29) fR1 / (-fR3) - - - - - (30) fR2 / (-fR3) - - - - - (29A) fR1 / (-fR3) 1.9087 1.4948 - - - (30A) fR2 / (-fR3) 0.8825 0.1448 - - - (31) fR1 / fR2 2.1629 10.3200 - - - (32) fR2 / fR4 0.4851 1.2697 - - - (27A) fR1 / fR3 - - 2.0598 2.0668 1.1200 (32A) fR2 / fR4 - - 0.9931 1.6305 17.9223 (33) fR3 / fR5 - - - - - (34) fR4 / fR6 - - - - - (31A) fR1 / fR2 - - - - - (35) fR2 / fR3 - - - - - (36) fR3 / (-fR4) - - - - - (31B) fR1 / fR2 - - - - - (37) fR3 / fR4 - - - - - (28A) fR1 / (-fR2) - - - - - (35A) fR2 / fR3 - - - - -

[0788] [Table 79]

[0789] Type No. Example 16 Embodiment 17 Embodiment 18 Embodiment 19 Embodiment 20 (1) TLw / (fw×tanωw) 7.5622 9.3478 8.2215 8.4499 8.4575 (2) Bfw / (fw×tanωw) 0.7866 0.8370 0.8469 1.4584 1.6241 (3) Fnot×(TLt / ft) 3.2871 3.1618 3.2018 3.4496 3.5898 (4) <![CDATA[(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 ]]> 0.7951 0.6678 0.6742 0.7204 0.7340 (5) tanωw / Fnow 0.1084 0.1081 0.1403 0.1464 0.1480 (6) TLt / TLw 1.4135 1.3339 1.2564 1.2601 1.2870 (7) fFw / (-fMw) 2.1206 4.1364 3.4431 2.6431 2.8771 (8) TLw / ft 0.8103 0.8202 0.8787 0.9440 0.9585 (9) ft / fw 2.9248 3.5498 3.7801 3.7997 3.8000 (10) fF1 / fw 3.7547 2.5851 3.3737 4.4795 5.7521 (11) fF1 / (-fMw) 5.6583 4.1364 3.4431 6.1868 8.1546 (12) <![CDATA[fF1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 ]]> 2.1955 1.3721 1.7352 2.2980 2.9508 (13) <![CDATA[(-fMw) / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 ]]> 0.3880 0.3317 0.5040 0.3714 0.3619 (14) fF1 / (ft / Fnot) 3.6844 2.1046 2.5883 3.4188 4.4049 (15) DDL1STw / fF1 0.2581 0.3589 0.3995 0.2601 0.2267 (16) DDL1STw / TLw 0.4089 0.3187 0.4058 0.3248 0.3580 (17) fw / fRw 1.6183 1.5997 1.2071 0.9915 1.0217 (18) ft / fRt 2.7474 4.3747 3.5509 3.0401 3.2723 (19) <![CDATA[fR1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 ]]> 2.8047 0.5480 0.3820 0.8989 0.7184 (20) fw / fR1 0.2085 0.9686 1.3464 0.5707 0.7140 (21) |fIS / ft| 0.2269 0.1761 0.2592 0.1905 0.1856 (22) Ndn+0.01×vdn 2.27695 2.1507 2.1507 2.15075 2.1507 (23) Ndp+0.01×vdp 2.38800 2.38800 2.38800 2.32352 2.32352

[0790] [Table 80]

[0791] Type No. Example 16 Embodiment 17 Embodiment 18 Embodiment 19 Embodiment 20 (24) vdFp_ave 79.65 82.67 82.67 82.57 76.45 (25) dF1 / fF1 0.0796 0.1459 0.1262 0.0576 0.0530 (26) GFave 3.72 3.18 3.18 3.91 3.10 (27) fR1 / fR3 - - - - - (28) fR1 / (-fR2) - - - - - (29) fR1 / (-fR3) - - - - - (30) fR2 / (-fR3) - - - - - (29A) fR1 / (-fR3) 7.5606 - - - - (30A) fR2 / (-fR3) 0.9223 - - - - (31) fR1 / fR2 8.1973 - - - - (32) fR2 / fR4 0.8348 - - - - (27A) fR1 / fR3 - 0.7514 0.5716 2.7532 2.1074 (32A) fR2 / fR4 - 4.3996 1.1930 1.4120 1.1445 (33) fR3 / fR5 - 1.3478 1.2229 - - (34) fR4 / fR6 - 2.0014 1.2938 - - (31A) fR1 / fR2 - - - - - (35) fR2 / fR3 - - - - - (36) fR3 / (-fR4) - - - - - (31B) fR1 / fR2 - - - - - (37) fR3 / fR4 - - - - - (28A) fR1 / (-fR2) - - - - - (35A) fR2 / fR3 - - - - -

[0792] [Table 81]

[0793] Type No. Embodiment 21 Embodiment 22 Embodiment 23 Embodiment 24 (1) TLw / (fw×tanωw) 8.2868 7.6375 8.3503 8.8122 (2) Bfw / (fw×tanωw) 1.0122 0.7710 0.7576 0.7693 (3) Fnot×(TLt / ft) 3.8435 3.7298 3.8486 3.2808 (4) <![CDATA[(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 ]]> 0.7529 0.6576 0.6826 0.7190 (5) tanωw / Fnow 0.1508 0.1437 0.1403 0.1075 (6) TLt / TLw 1.3614 1.5085 1.4918 1.3829 (7) fFw / (-fMw) 3.9506 2.7154 2.3917 4.0992 (8) TLw / ft 0.9702 0.8497 0.8927 0.8266 (9) ft / fw 3.7496 3.7600 3.7795 3.2999 (10) fF1 / fw 2.8560 6.8963 7.6118 2.6357 (11) fF1 / (-fMw) 3.9506 10.9740 10.2890 4.0992 (12) <![CDATA[fF1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 ]]> 1.4749 3.5565 3.9154 1.4509 (13) <![CDATA[(-fMw) / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 ]]> 0.3733 0.3241 0.3805 0.3540 (14) fF1 / (ft / Fnot) 2.2165 5.3373 5.8204 2.2923 (15) DDL1STw / fF1 0.3989 0.1815 0.1741 0.3125 (16) DDL1STw / TLw 0.3132 0.3919 0.3929 0.3019 (17) fw / fRw 1.0214 1.3287 1.2547 1.7030 (18) ft / fRt 2.8212 3.9515 3.0933 4.1924 (19) <![CDATA[fR1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 ]]> 0.5137 0.4184 0.6186 0.6478 (20) fw / fR1 110052 1.2325 0.8315 0.8498 (21) |fIs / ft| 0.1928 0.1672 0.1957 0.1949 (22) Ndn+0.01×vdn 2.17376 2.2058 2.2279 2.1507 (23) Ndp+0.01×vdp 2.32352 2.38800 2.38800 2.38800

[0794] [Table 82]

[0795] Type No. Embodiment 21 Embodiment 22 Embodiment 23 Embodiment 24 (24) vdFp_ave 73.39 84.90 79.65 82.67 (25) dF1 / fF1 0.1435 0.0377 0.0403 0.1475 (26) GFave 3.58 3.76 3.48 3.18 (27) fR1 / fR3 - - - - (28) fR1 / (-fR2) - - - - (29) fR1 / (-fR3) - - - - (30) fR2 / (-fR3) - - - - (29A) fR1 / (-fR3) - - - - (30A) fR2 / (-fR3) - - - - (31) fR1 / fR2 - - - - (32) fR2 / fR4 - - - - (27A) fR1 / fR3 0.8601 1.4986 1.3409 - (32A) fR2 / fR4 2.5727 1.0457 1.8477 - (33) fR3 / fR5 0.3672 - 0.8603 - (34) fR4 / fR6 0.0459 - 1.4565 - (31A) fR1 / fR2 - - - 0.3391 (35) fR2 / fR3 - - - 1.7857 (36) fR3 / (-fR4) - - - 1.1361 (31B) fR1 / fR2 - - - - (37) fR3 / fR4 - - - - (28A) fR1 / (-fR2) - - - - (35A) fR2 / fR3 - - - -

[0796] The variable power optical systems of Examples 1 to 24 are compact, but the F value is 3.3 or less in the entire variable power range, achieving a small F value. In particular, some of the examples have an F value of 3 or less in the entire variable power range. In addition, the variable power optical systems of Examples 1 to 24 correct various aberrations well in the entire variable power range and maintain high optical performance.

[0797] Next, an imaging device according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described. Fig.51 and Fig.52 , an external view of a camera 30 as an imaging device according to an embodiment of the present invention is shown. Fig.51 1 is a perspective view showing the camera 30 as viewed from the front side. Fig.52 The camera 30 is a perspective view viewed from the back. The camera 30 is a so-called mirrorless digital camera, and can detachably mount an interchangeable lens 20. The interchangeable lens 20 includes the variable power optical system 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention housed in a lens barrel.

[0798] The camera 30 includes a camera body 31, and a shutter button 32 and a power button 33 are provided on the upper surface of the camera body 31. In addition, an operation unit 34, an operation unit 35 and a display unit 36 ​​are provided on the back surface of the camera body 31. The display unit 36 ​​can display the captured image and the image existing in the angle of view before the capture.

[0799] A photographing opening for incident light from a photographic subject is provided at the center of the front surface of the camera body 31 , and a bayonet mount 37 is provided at a position corresponding to the photographing opening. The interchangeable lens 20 is mounted on the camera body 31 via the bayonet mount 37 .

[0800] An imaging element such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) that outputs an imaging signal corresponding to an image of a subject formed by the interchangeable lens 20, a signal processing circuit that processes the imaging signal output from the imaging element to generate an image, and a recording medium for recording the generated image are provided in the camera body 31. In the camera 30, a still image or a moving image can be captured by pressing a shutter button 32, and the image data obtained by the capturing is recorded in the recording medium.

[0801] The above embodiments and examples are used to illustrate the technology of the present invention, but the technology of the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments and examples, and various modifications are possible. For example, the radius of curvature, surface spacing, refractive index, Abbe number and aspheric coefficient of each lens are not limited to the values ​​shown in the above embodiments, and other values ​​can be used.

[0802] Furthermore, the imaging device according to the embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and can be variously configured as a camera other than a mirrorless camera, a film camera, a video camera, a security camera, and the like.

[0803] The following supplementary notes are further disclosed with respect to the above-mentioned embodiments and examples.

[0804] [Note 1]

[0805] A variable magnification optical system, which comprises a front group, a middle group and a rear group in order from the object side to the image side,

[0806] The front group includes no more than two lens groups with positive refractive power,

[0807] The intermediate group includes no more than two lens groups with negative refractive power,

[0808] The rear group includes a plurality of lens groups,

[0809] The lens group closest to the object side of the rear group has positive refractive power.

[0810] When changing magnification, the lens group closest to the object in the front group moves, and all the intervals between adjacent lens groups change.

[0811] The sum of the distance on the optical axis from the lens surface of the front group closest to the object side to the lens surface of the rear group closest to the image side in a state where the lens is focused on an infinitely distant object at the wide angle end and the back focal length of the entire system in terms of air conversion distance is denoted as TLw.

[0812] Let fw be the focal length of the entire system when focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide angle end.

[0813] The maximum half angle of view when focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end is ωw,

[0814] The back focal length of the entire system in terms of air conversion distance when focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end is Bfw.

[0815] Set the open F value when focusing on an object at infinity at the telephoto end to Fnot.

[0816] The sum of the distance on the optical axis from the lens surface closest to the object side of the front group to the lens surface closest to the image side of the rear group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the telephoto end and the back focal length of the entire system in terms of air conversion distance is set to TLt.

[0817] When the focal length of the entire system in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the telephoto end is ft, the following conditional expressions (1), (2), and (3) are satisfied:

[0818] 5<TLw / (fw×tanωw)<12 (1)

[0819] 0.5<Bfw / (fw×tanωw)<2.5 (2)

[0820] 1.8<Fnot×(TLt / ft)<5 (3).

[0821] [Note 2]

[0822] According to the variable power optical system described in Supplementary Note 1, it satisfies the following conditional expression (3-1):

[0823] 1.9<Fnot×(TLt / ft)<4.6 (3-1).

[0824] [Note 3]

[0825] According to the variable power optical system described in Supplementary Note 2, it satisfies the following conditional expression (3-2):

[0826] 2<Fnot×(TLt / ft)<4.3 (3-2).

[0827] [Note 4]

[0828] According to the variable power optical system described in Supplement 3, it satisfies the following conditional expression (3-3):

[0829] 2.2<Fnot×(TLt / ft)<4 (3-3).

[0830] [Note 5]

[0831] A variable power optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 4, which satisfies the following conditional expression (4):

[0832] 0.34<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.97 (4).

[0833] [Note 6]

[0834] According to the variable power optical system described in Supplementary Note 5, it satisfies the following conditional expression (4-1):

[0835] 0.36<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.92 (4-1).

[0836] [Note 7]

[0837] According to the variable power optical system described in Supplementary Note 6, it satisfies the following conditional expression (4-2):

[0838] 0.38<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.87 (4-2).

[0839] [Note 8]

[0840] According to the variable power optical system described in Supplementary Note 7, it satisfies the following conditional expression (4-3):

[0841] 0.41<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.8 (4-3).

[0842] [Note 9]

[0843] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 8, wherein:

[0844] When the open F value in a state where the image is focused on an object at infinity at the wide angle end is Fnow, the following conditional expression (5) is satisfied:

[0845] 0.075<tanωw / Fnow<0.3 (5).

[0846] [Note 10]

[0847] According to the variable power optical system described in Supplementary Note 9, it satisfies the following conditional expression (5-1):

[0848] 0.092<tanωw / Fnow<0.27 (5-1).

[0849] [Note 11]

[0850] According to the variable power optical system described in Supplementary Note 10, it satisfies the following conditional expression (5-2):

[0851] 0.105<tanωw / Fnow<0.25 (5-2).

[0852] [Note 12]

[0853] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 11, which satisfies the following conditional expression (6):

[0854] 1.1<TLt / TLw<1.9 (6).

[0855] [Note 13]

[0856] According to the variable power optical system described in Supplementary Note 12, it satisfies the following conditional expression (6-1),

[0857] 1.15<TLt / TLw<1.48 (6-1).

[0858] [Note 14]

[0859] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 13, wherein:

[0860] When the focal length of the front group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at a wide angle end is fFw,

[0861] When the focal length of the intermediate group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide angle end is fMw, the following conditional expression (7) is satisfied:

[0862] 0.8<fFw / (-fMw)<8 (7).

[0863] [Note 15]

[0864] According to the variable power optical system described in Supplementary Note 14, it satisfies the following conditional expression (7-1),

[0865] 1.1<fFw / (-fMw)<5.3 (7-1).

[0866] [Note 16]

[0867] A variable power optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 15, which satisfies the following conditional expression (8):

[0868] 0.8<TLw / ft<1.5 (8).

[0869] [Note 17]

[0870] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 16, wherein:

[0871] The rear group includes an Lp1 lens having positive refractive power and an Ln1 lens having negative refractive power and being arranged adjacent to the image side of the Lp1 lens.

[0872] The image-side surface of the Lp1 lens is an aspherical surface whose refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is shifted more negatively than the refractive power in the paraxial region.

[0873] The object-side surface of the Ln1 lens has an aspherical shape in which the refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is shifted more toward the positive direction than the refractive power in the paraxial region.

[0874] [Note 18]

[0875] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 17, wherein:

[0876] The rear group includes an Ln2 lens having negative refractive power and an Lp2 lens having positive refractive power and being arranged adjacent to the image side of the Ln2 lens.

[0877] The object-side surface of the Ln2 lens is an aspherical surface whose refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is shifted more negatively than the refractive power in the paraxial region.

[0878] The image-side surface of the Ln2 lens has an aspherical shape in which the refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is shifted more positively than the refractive power in the paraxial region.

[0879] [Note 19]

[0880] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 18, which satisfies the following conditional expression (9):

[0881] 2.1<ft / fw<6 (9).

[0882] [Note 20]

[0883] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 19, wherein:

[0884] When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the front group is set to fF1, the following conditional expression (10) is satisfied:

[0885] 1.5<fF1 / fw<12 (10).

[0886] [Note 21]

[0887] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 20, wherein:

[0888] When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the front group is set to fF1,

[0889] When the focal length of the intermediate group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide angle end is set to fMw, the following conditional expression (11) is satisfied:

[0890] 2<fF1 / (-fMw)<13 (11).

[0891] [Note 22]

[0892] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 21, wherein:

[0893] When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the front group is set to fF1, the following conditional expression (12) is satisfied:

[0894] 0.7<fF1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 <4.7 (12).

[0895] [Note 23]

[0896] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 22, wherein:

[0897] When the focal length of the intermediate group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide angle end is set to fMw, the following conditional expression (13) is satisfied:

[0898] 0.18<(-fMw) / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 <0.8 (13).

[0899] [Note 24]

[0900] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 23, wherein:

[0901] When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the front group is set to fF1, the following conditional expression (14) is satisfied:

[0902] 1.3<fF1 / (ft / Fnot)<8 (14).

[0903] [Note 25]

[0904] According to the variable power optical system described in Supplementary Note 24, it satisfies the following conditional expression (14-1),

[0905] 1.75<fF1 / (ft / Fnot)<2.7 (14-1).

[0906] [Note 26]

[0907] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 25, wherein:

[0908] The variable power optical system includes an aperture stop on the image side of the lens surface closest to the image side of the intermediate group.

[0909] When the distance on the optical axis from the lens surface of the front group closest to the object to the aperture stop in a state where the lens is focused on an infinitely distant object at the wide angle end is DDL1STw,

[0910] When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the front group is set to fF1, the following conditional expression (15) is satisfied:

[0911] 0.1<DDL1STw / fF1<0.9 (15).

[0912] [Note 27]

[0913] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 26, wherein:

[0914] The variable magnification optical system includes an aperture stop,

[0915] When the distance on the optical axis from the lens surface of the front group closest to the object to the aperture stop in a state where the lens is focused on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end is set to DDL1STw, the following conditional expression (16) is satisfied:

[0916] 0.18<DDL1STw / TLw<0.75 (16).

[0917] [Note 28]

[0918] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 27, wherein:

[0919] When the focal length of the rear group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end is set to fRw, the following conditional expression (17) is satisfied:

[0920] 0.7<fw / fRw<3 (17).

[0921] [Note 29]

[0922] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 28, wherein:

[0923] When the focal length of the rear group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the telephoto end is set to fRt, the following conditional expression (18) is satisfied:

[0924] 1.1<ft / fRt<7 (18).

[0925] [Note 30]

[0926] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 29, wherein:

[0927] When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the rear group is set to fR1, the following conditional expression (19) is satisfied:

[0928] 0.05<fR1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 <3 (19).

[0929] [Note 31]

[0930] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 30, wherein:

[0931] When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the rear group is set to fR1, the following conditional expression (20) is satisfied:

[0932] 0.05<fw / fR1<2.5 (20).

[0933] [Note 32]

[0934] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 31, wherein:

[0935] At least one lens group that does not move during zooming is arranged between the lens group closest to the image side of the front group and the rear group.

[0936] [Note 33]

[0937] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 32, wherein:

[0938] An anti-vibration group is arranged on the image side of the front group so as to move in a direction intersecting the optical axis during image shake correction.

[0939] When the focal length of the anti-vibration group is set to fIS, the following conditional expression (21) is satisfied:

[0940] 0.07<|fIS / ft|<0.5 (21).

[0941] [Note 34]

[0942] A variable magnification optical system according to Supplement 33, wherein:

[0943] The anti-vibration group is arranged in the middle group.

[0944] [Note 35]

[0945] The variable magnification optical system according to Supplement 1, wherein:

[0946] The focus group that moves along the optical axis during focusing is arranged only in the rear group.

[0947] [Note 36]

[0948] A variable magnification optical system according to Supplement 35, wherein:

[0949] The two focus groups are arranged in the rear group.

[0950] [Note 37]

[0951] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 36, wherein:

[0952] The front group includes a cemented lens formed by cementing a negative meniscus lens with a convex surface facing the object side and a positive lens with a convex surface facing the object side in sequence from the object side.

[0953] When the refractive index of the negative meniscus lens with respect to the d-line is set to Ndn,

[0954] When the Abbe number of the negative meniscus lens based on the d line is vdn, the following conditional expression (22) is satisfied:

[0955] 1.94<Ndn+0.01×vdn<2.5 (22).

[0956] [Note 38]

[0957] A variable magnification optical system according to Supplement 37, wherein:

[0958] When the refractive index of the positive lens with respect to the d-line is Ndp,

[0959] When the d-line-based Abbe number of the positive lens is vdp, the following conditional expression (23) is satisfied:

[0960] 2<Ndp+0.01×vdp<2.6 (23).

[0961] [Note 39]

[0962] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 38, wherein:

[0963] When the average value of the d-line-based Abbe numbers of all the positive lenses in the front group is vdFp_ave, the following conditional expression (24) is satisfied:

[0964] 55<vdFp_ave<95 (24).

[0965] [Note 40]

[0966] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 39, wherein:

[0967] The thickness of the lens group closest to the object on the optical axis of the front group is dF1.

[0968] When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the front group is set to fF1, the following conditional expression (25) is satisfied:

[0969] 0.03<dF1 / fF1<0.35 (25).

[0970] [Note 41]

[0971] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 40, wherein:

[0972] When the average value of the specific gravity of all lenses in the front group is GFave, the following conditional expression (26) is satisfied:

[0973] 2<GFave<4.3 (26).

[0974] [Note 42]

[0975] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 41, wherein:

[0976] The rear group includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, and a third subsequent lens group with positive refractive power.

[0977] [Note 43]

[0978] A variable magnification optical system according to Supplement 42, wherein:

[0979] When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1,

[0980] When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (27) is satisfied:

[0981] 0.05<fR1 / fR3<0.6 (27).

[0982] [Note 44]

[0983] A variable magnification optical system according to Supplement 42 or Supplement 43, wherein:

[0984] When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1,

[0985] When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, the following conditional expression (28) is satisfied:

[0986] 0.2<fR1 / (-fR2)<1 (28).

[0987] [Note 45]

[0988] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 41, wherein:

[0989] The rear group includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, and a third subsequent lens group with negative refractive power.

[0990] [Note 46]

[0991] A variable magnification optical system according to Supplement 45, wherein:

[0992] When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1,

[0993] When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (29) is satisfied:

[0994] 0.5<fR1 / (-fR3)<1.6 (29).

[0995] [Note 47]

[0996] A variable magnification optical system according to Supplement 45 or Supplement 46, wherein:

[0997] When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2,

[0998] When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (30) is satisfied:

[0999] 0.8<fR2 / (-fR3)<3 (30).

[1000] [Note 48]

[1001] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 41, wherein:

[1002] The rear group includes, in order from the object side to the image side, at least a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group with positive refractive power.

[1003] [Note 49]

[1004] A variable magnification optical system according to Supplement 48, wherein:

[1005] When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1,

[1006] When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (29A) is satisfied:

[1007] 0.9<fR1 / (-fR3)<10 (29A).

[1008] [Note 50]

[1009] A variable power optical system according to Supplement 48 or Supplement 49, wherein:

[1010] When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2,

[1011] When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (30A) is satisfied:

[1012] 0.1<fR2 / (-fR3)<1.8 (30A).

[1013] [Note 51]

[1014] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 48 to 50, wherein:

[1015] When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1,

[1016] When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, the following conditional expression (31) is satisfied:

[1017] 1.2<fR1 / fR2<11 (31).

[1018] [Note 52]

[1019] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 48 to 51, wherein:

[1020] When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2,

[1021] When the focal length of the fourth subsequent lens group is set to fR4, the following conditional expression (32) is satisfied:

[1022] 0.1<fR2 / fR4<1.5 (32).

[1023] [Note 53]

[1024] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 41, wherein:

[1025] The rear group includes, in sequence from the object side to the image side, at least a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group with negative refractive power.

[1026] [Note 54]

[1027] A variable magnification optical system according to Supplement 53, wherein:

[1028] When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1,

[1029] When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (27A) is satisfied:

[1030] 0.25<fR1 / fR3<6 (27A).

[1031] [Note 55]

[1032] The variable magnification optical system according to Supplement 53 or Supplement 54, wherein:

[1033] When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2,

[1034] When the focal length of the fourth subsequent lens group is set to fR4, the following conditional expression (32A) is satisfied:

[1035] 0.4<fR2 / fR4<18 (32A).

[1036] [Note 56]

[1037] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 53 to 55, wherein:

[1038] The rear group includes, from the object side to the image side, the first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, the second subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, the third subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, the fourth subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, the fifth subsequent lens group with positive refractive power and the sixth subsequent lens group with negative refractive power.

[1039] [Note 57]

[1040] A variable magnification optical system according to Supplementary Note 56, wherein:

[1041] When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3,

[1042] When the focal length of the fifth subsequent lens group is set to fR5, the following conditional expression (33) is satisfied:

[1043] 0.2<fR3 / fR5<2.5 (33).

[1044] [Note 58]

[1045] A variable magnification optical system according to Supplement 56 or Supplement 57, wherein:

[1046] When the focal length of the fourth subsequent lens group is set to fR4,

[1047] When the focal length of the sixth subsequent lens group is set to fR6, the following conditional expression (34) is satisfied:

[1048] 0.04<fR4 / fR6<4 (34).

[1049] [Note 59]

[1050] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 41, wherein:

[1051] The rear group includes, in sequence from the object side to the image side, at least a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group with negative refractive power.

[1052] [Note 60]

[1053] A variable magnification optical system according to Supplement 59, wherein:

[1054] When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1,

[1055] When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, the following conditional expression (31A) is satisfied:

[1056] 0.06<fR1 / fR2<0.7 (31A).

[1057] [Note 61]

[1058] A variable magnification optical system according to Supplement 59 or Supplement 60, wherein:

[1059] When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2,

[1060] When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (35) is satisfied:

[1061] 0.5<fR2 / fR3<11 (35).

[1062] [Note 62]

[1063] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 59 to 61, wherein:

[1064] When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3,

[1065] When the focal length of the fourth subsequent lens group is set to fR4, the following conditional expression (36) is satisfied:

[1066] 0.2<fR3 / (-fR4)<3 (36).

[1067] [Note 63]

[1068] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 41, wherein:

[1069] The rear group includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group with negative refractive power.

[1070] [Note 64]

[1071] A variable magnification optical system according to Supplement 63, wherein:

[1072] When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1,

[1073] When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, the following conditional expression (31B) is satisfied:

[1074] 0.6<fR1 / fR2<4 (31B).

[1075] [Note 65]

[1076] A variable magnification optical system according to Supplement 63 or Supplement 64, wherein:

[1077] When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3,

[1078] When the focal length of the fourth subsequent lens group is set to fR4, the following conditional expression (37) is satisfied:

[1079] 0.05<fR3 / fR4<1 (37).

[1080] [Note 66]

[1081] A variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplement 1 to Supplement 41, wherein:

[1082] The rear group includes at least a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, and a third subsequent lens group with negative refractive power in order from the object side to the image side.

[1083] [Note 67]

[1084] A variable magnification optical system according to Supplementary Note 66, wherein:

[1085] When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1,

[1086] When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, the following conditional expression (28A) is satisfied:

[1087] 0.2<fR1 / (-fR2)<1 (28A).

[1088] [Note 68]

[1089] A variable power optical system according to Supplement 66 or Supplement 67, wherein:

[1090] When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2,

[1091] When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (35A) is satisfied:

[1092] 0.2<fR2 / fR3<1 (35A).

[1093] [Note 69]

[1094] An imaging device comprising the variable magnification optical system according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 68.

Claims

1. A variable magnification optical system, which comprises a front group, a middle group and a rear group in order from the object side to the image side, The front group includes no more than two lens groups with positive refractive power, The intermediate group includes no more than two lens groups with negative refractive power, The rear group includes a plurality of lens groups, The lens group closest to the object side of the rear group has positive refractive power. When changing magnification, the lens group closest to the object in the front group moves, and all the intervals between adjacent lens groups change. The sum of the distance on the optical axis from the lens surface of the front group closest to the object side to the lens surface of the rear group closest to the image side in a state where the lens is focused on an infinitely distant object at the wide angle end and the back focal length of the entire system in terms of air conversion distance is denoted as TLw. Let fw be the focal length of the entire system when focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide angle end. The maximum half angle of view when focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end is ωw, The back focal length of the entire system in terms of air conversion distance when focusing on an infinitely far object at the wide angle end is Bfw. Set the open F value when focusing on an object at infinity at the telephoto end to Fnot. The sum of the distance on the optical axis from the lens surface closest to the object side of the front group to the lens surface closest to the image side of the rear group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the telephoto end and the back focal length of the entire system in terms of air conversion distance is set to TLt. When the focal length of the entire system in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the telephoto end is ft, the following conditional expressions (1), (2), and (3) are satisfied: 5 <TLw / (fw×tanωw)<12 (1) 0.5 <Bfw / (fw×tanωw)<2.5 (2) 1.8 <Fnot×(TLt / ft)<5 (3)。 2. The variable magnification optical system according to claim 1, which satisfies the following conditional expression (3-1): 1.9 <Fnot×(TLt / ft)<4.6 (3-1)。 3. The variable magnification optical system according to claim 2, which satisfies the following conditional expression (3-2): 2 <Fnot×(TLt / ft)<4.3 (3-2)。 4. The variable magnification optical system according to claim 3, which satisfies the following conditional expression (3-3): 2.2 <Fnot×(TLt / ft)<4 (3-3)。 5. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, which satisfies the following conditional expression (4): 0.34<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.97 (4)。 6. The variable magnification optical system according to claim 5, which satisfies the following conditional expression (4-1): 0.36<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.92 (4-1)。 7. The variable power optical system according to claim 6, which satisfies the following conditional expression (4-2): 0.38<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.87 (4-2)。 8. The variable power optical system according to claim 7, which satisfies the following conditional expression (4-3): 0.41<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.8 (4-3)。 9. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, When the open F value in a state where the image is focused on an object at infinity at the wide angle end is Fnow, the following conditional expression (5) is satisfied: 0.075 <tanωw / Fnow<0.3 (5)。 10. The variable power optical system according to claim 9, which satisfies the following conditional expression (5-1): 0.092 <tanωw / Fnow<0.27 (5-1)。 11. The variable power optical system according to claim 10, which satisfies the following conditional expression (5-2): 0.105 <tanωw / Fnow<0.25 (5-2)。 12. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 3, which satisfies the following conditional expression (6): 1.1 <TLt / TLw<1.9 (6)。 13. The variable magnification optical system according to claim 12, which satisfies the following conditional expression (6-1): 1.15 <TLt / TLw<1.48 (6-1)。 14. The variable magnification optical system according to claim 12, which satisfies the following conditional expression (3-3): 2.2 <Fnot×(TLt / ft)<4 (3-3)。 15. The variable power optical system according to claim 14, which satisfies the following conditional expression (4-3): 0.41<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.8 (4-3)。 16. The variable power optical system according to claim 15, which satisfies the following conditional expression (5-2): 0.105 <tanωw / Fnow<0.25 (5-2)。 17. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, When the focal length of the front group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at a wide angle end is fFw, When the focal length of the intermediate group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide angle end is fMw, the following conditional expression (7) is satisfied: 0.8 <fFw / (-fMw)<8 (7)。 18. The variable power optical system according to claim 17, which satisfies the following conditional expression (7-1): 1.1 <fFw / (-fMw)<5.3 (7-1)。 19. The variable power optical system according to claim 18, which satisfies the following conditional expression (8): 0.8 <TLw / ft<1.5 (8)。 20. The variable power optical system according to claim 19, which satisfies the following conditional expression (6-1): 1.15 <TLt / TLw<1.48 (6-1)。 21. The variable power optical system according to claim 20, which satisfies the following conditional expression (4-2): 0.38<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.87 (4-2)。 22. The variable power optical system according to claim 21, which satisfies the following conditional expression (5-1): 0.092 <tanωw / Fnow<0.27 (5-1)。 23. The variable power optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, which satisfies the following conditional expression (4-1): 0.36<(fw×TLw×Fnot) / ft 2 <0.92 (4-1)。 24. The variable power optical system according to claim 23, which satisfies the following conditional expression (5-1): 0.092 <tanωw / Fnow<0.27 (5-1)。 25. The variable power optical system according to claim 23, which satisfies the following conditional expression (5-2): 0.105 <tanωw / Fnow<0.25 (5-2)。 26. The variable magnification optical system according to claim 24 or 25, in, The rear group includes an Lp1 lens having positive refractive power and an Ln1 lens having negative refractive power and being arranged adjacent to the image side of the Lp1 lens. The image-side surface of the Lp1 lens is an aspherical surface whose refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is shifted more negatively than the refractive power in the paraxial region. The object-side surface of the Ln1 lens has an aspherical shape in which the refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is shifted more toward the positive direction than the refractive power in the paraxial region.

27. The variable power optical system according to claim 24 or 25, in, The rear group includes an Ln2 lens having negative refractive power and an Lp2 lens having positive refractive power and being arranged adjacent to the image side of the Ln2 lens. The object-side surface of the Ln2 lens is an aspherical surface whose refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is shifted more negatively than the refractive power in the paraxial region. The image-side surface of the Ln2 lens has an aspherical shape in which the refractive power at the position of the maximum effective diameter is shifted more positively than the refractive power in the paraxial region.

28. The variable power optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, which satisfies the following conditional expression (9): 2.1 <ft / fw<6 (9)。 29. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the front group is set to fF1, the following conditional expression (10) is satisfied: 1.5 <fF1 / fw<12 (10)。 30. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the front group is set to fF1, When the focal length of the intermediate group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide angle end is set to fMw, the following conditional expression (11) is satisfied: 2 <fF1 / (-fMw)<13 (11)。 31. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the front group is set to fF1, the following conditional expression (12) is satisfied: 0.7<fF1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 <4.7 (12)。 32. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, When the focal length of the intermediate group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide angle end is set to fMw, the following conditional expression (13) is satisfied: 0.18<(-fMw) / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 <0.8 (13).

33. The variable magnification optical system according to claim 5, in, When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the front group is set to fF1, the following conditional expression (14) is satisfied: 1.3 <fF1 / (ft / Fnot)<8 (14)。 34. The variable power optical system according to claim 33, which satisfies the following conditional expression (14-1): 1.75 <fF1 / (ft / Fnot)<2.7 (14-1)。 35. The variable power optical system according to claim 34, which satisfies the following conditional expression (2-1): 0.75 <Bfw / (fw×tanωw)<1.84 (2-1)。 36. The variable power optical system according to claim 35, which satisfies the following conditional expression (5-1): 0.092 <tanωw / Fnow<0.27 (5-1)。 37. The variable power optical system according to claim 36, which satisfies the following conditional expression (6): 1.1 <TLt / TLw<1.9 (6)。 38. The variable power optical system according to claim 37, which satisfies the following conditional expression (8): 0.8 <TLw / ft<1.5 (8)。 39. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, The variable power optical system includes an aperture stop on the image side of the lens surface closest to the image side of the intermediate group. When the distance on the optical axis from the lens surface of the front group closest to the object to the aperture stop in a state where the lens is focused on an infinitely distant object at the wide angle end is DDL1STw, When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the front group is set to fF1, the following conditional expression (15) is satisfied: 0.1 <DDL1STw / fF1<0.9 (15)。 40. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, The variable magnification optical system includes an aperture stop, When the distance on the optical axis from the lens surface of the front group closest to the object to the aperture stop in a state where the lens is focused on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end is set to DDL1STw, the following conditional expression (16) is satisfied: 0.18 <DDL1STw / TLw<0.75 (16)。 41. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, When the focal length of the rear group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the wide-angle end is set to fRw, the following conditional expression (17) is satisfied: 0.7 <fw / fRw<3 (17)。 42. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, When the focal length of the rear group in a state of focusing on an infinitely distant object at the telephoto end is set to fRt, the following conditional expression (18) is satisfied: 1.1 <ft / fRt<7 (18)。 43. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the rear group is set to fR1, the following conditional expression (19) is satisfied: 0.05<fR1 / (fw×ft) 1 / 2 <3 (19)。 44. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the rear group is set to fR1, the following conditional expression (20) is satisfied: 0.05 <fw / fR1<2.5 (20)。 45. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, At least one lens group that does not move during zooming is arranged between the lens group closest to the image side of the front group and the rear group.

46. ​​The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, An anti-vibration group is arranged on the image side of the front group so as to move in a direction intersecting the optical axis during image shake correction. When the focal length of the anti-vibration group is set to fIS, the following conditional expression (21) is satisfied: 0.07<|fIS / ft|<0.5 (21).

47. The variable power optical system according to claim 46, in, The anti-vibration group is arranged in the middle group.

48. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, The focus group that moves along the optical axis during focusing is arranged only in the rear group.

49. The variable power optical system according to claim 48, in, The two focus groups are arranged in the rear group.

50. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, The front group includes a cemented lens formed by cementing a negative meniscus lens with a convex surface facing the object side and a positive lens with a convex surface facing the object side in sequence from the object side. When the refractive index of the negative meniscus lens with respect to the d-line is set to Ndn, When the d-line-based Abbe number of the negative meniscus lens is νdn, the following conditional expression (22) is satisfied: 1.94 <Ndn+0.01×νdn<2.5 (22)。 51. The variable magnification optical system according to claim 50, in, When the refractive index of the positive lens with respect to the d-line is Ndp, When the Abbe number of the d-line reference of the positive lens is νdp, the following conditional expression (23) is satisfied: 2 <Ndp+0.01×νdp<2.6 (23)。 52. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, When the average value of the d-line-based Abbe numbers of all the positive lenses in the front group is denoted by v dFp_ave, the following conditional expression (24) is satisfied: 55<ν dFp_ave<95 (24).

53. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, The thickness of the lens group closest to the object on the optical axis of the front group is dF1. When the focal length of the lens group closest to the object in the front group is set to fF1, the following conditional expression (25) is satisfied: 0.03 <dF1 / fF1<0.35 (25)。 54. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, When the average value of the specific gravity of all lenses in the front group is GFave, the following conditional expression (26) is satisfied: 2 <GFave<4.3 (26)。 55. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, The rear group includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, and a third subsequent lens group with positive refractive power.

56. The variable power optical system according to claim 55, in, When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1, When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (27) is satisfied: 0.05 <fR1 / fR3<0.6 (27)。 57. The variable power optical system according to claim 55, in, When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1, When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, the following conditional expression (28) is satisfied: 0.2 <fR1 / (-fR2)<1 (28)。 58. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, The rear group includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, and a third subsequent lens group with negative refractive power.

59. The variable power optical system according to claim 58, in, When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1, When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (29) is satisfied: 0.5 <fR1 / (-fR3)<1.6 (29)。 60. The variable power optical system according to claim 58, in, When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (30) is satisfied: 0.8 <fR2 / (-fR3)<3 (30)。 61. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, The rear group includes, in order from the object side to the image side, at least a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group with positive refractive power.

62. The variable power optical system according to claim 61, in, When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1, When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (29A) is satisfied: 0.9 <fR1 / (-fR3)<10 (29A)。 63. The variable power optical system according to claim 61, in, When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (30A) is satisfied: 0.1 <fR2 / (-fR3)<1.8 (30A)。 64. The variable power optical system according to claim 61, in, When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1, When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, the following conditional expression (31) is satisfied: 1.2 <fR1 / fR2<11 (31)。 65. The variable power optical system according to claim 61, in, When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, When the focal length of the fourth subsequent lens group is set to fR4, the following conditional expression (32) is satisfied: 0.1 <fR2 / fR4<1.5 (32)。 66. A variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, The rear group includes, in sequence from the object side to the image side, at least a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, a third subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group with negative refractive power.

67. The variable power optical system according to claim 66, in, When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1, When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (27A) is satisfied: 0.25 <fR1 / fR3<6 (27A)。 68. The variable power optical system according to claim 66, in, When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, When the focal length of the fourth subsequent lens group is set to fR4, the following conditional expression (32A) is satisfied: 0.4 <fR2 / fR4<18 (32A)。 69. The variable power optical system according to claim 66, in, The rear group includes, from the object side to the image side, the first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, the second subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, the third subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, the fourth subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, the fifth subsequent lens group with positive refractive power and the sixth subsequent lens group with negative refractive power.

70. The variable power optical system according to claim 69, in, When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, When the focal length of the fifth subsequent lens group is set to fR5, the following conditional expression (33) is satisfied: 0.2 <fR3 / fR5<2.5 (33)。 71. The variable power optical system according to claim 69, in, When the focal length of the fourth subsequent lens group is set to fR4, When the focal length of the sixth subsequent lens group is set to fR6, the following conditional expression (34) is satisfied: 0.04 <fR4 / fR6<4 (34)。 72. The variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, The rear group includes, in sequence from the object side to the image side, at least a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group with negative refractive power.

73. The variable magnification optical system according to claim 72, in, When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1, When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, the following conditional expression (31A) is satisfied: 0.06 <fR1 / fR2<0.7 (31A)。 74. The variable power optical system according to claim 72, in, When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (35) is satisfied: 0.5 <fR2 / fR3<11 (35)。 75. The variable power optical system according to claim 72, in, When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, When the focal length of the fourth subsequent lens group is set to fR4, the following conditional expression (36) is satisfied: 0.2 <fR3 / (-fR4)<3 (36)。 76. A variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, The rear group includes, from the object side to the image side, a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a third subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, and a fourth subsequent lens group with negative refractive power.

77. The variable power optical system according to claim 76, in, When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1, When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, the following conditional expression (31B) is satisfied: 0.6 <fR1 / fR2<4 (31B)。 78. The variable power optical system according to claim 76, in, When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, When the focal length of the fourth subsequent lens group is set to fR4, the following conditional expression (37) is satisfied: 0.05 <fR3 / fR4<1 (37)。 79. A variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 4, in, The rear group includes at least a first subsequent lens group with positive refractive power, a second subsequent lens group with negative refractive power, and a third subsequent lens group with negative refractive power in order from the object side to the image side.

80. The variable power optical system according to claim 79, in, When the focal length of the first subsequent lens group is set to fR1, When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, the following conditional expression (28A) is satisfied: 0.2 <fR1 / (-fR2)<1 (28A)。 81. The variable power optical system according to claim 79, in, When the focal length of the second subsequent lens group is set to fR2, When the focal length of the third subsequent lens group is set to fR3, the following conditional expression (35A) is satisfied: 0.2 <fR2 / fR3<1 (35A)。 82. An imaging device comprising the variable magnification optical system according to any one of claims 1 to 81.

Images